Product Description(V100R010 08)

8/21/2019 Product Description(V100R010 08)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/product-descriptionv100r010-08 1/384

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

System

V100R010

Product Description

Issue 08

Date 2011-09-16

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.



Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the

customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the

purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations

of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and

recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 08 (2011-09-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com/



About This Document

Related Versions

The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 3500 V100R010

Intended Audience

This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions,

hardware and software structure, and features.

The intended audiences of this document are:

l Network Planning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer

l System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,

performance degradation, or unexpected results.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description About This Document



ii



Symbol Description

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK .

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History

Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 08 (2011-09-16) Based on Product VersionV100R010

This document is the eighth release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 07,

the following contents are added or optimized:

lThe description that the number of PPS groups for lower order services that is supported by the equipment is added to the "1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards" section.


This document is the seventh release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release

06, the following contents are added or optimized:

l The N3EAS2 board is added in V100R010C03.

l The "ERPS" topic is added under the "Network Level Protection" Heading.





iii



l The structure of topic "ASON Features" is adjusted.


This document is the sixth release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 05,


l The description of N3EAS2 boards is deleted.

l The description of the support for intelligent clock is added to topic "Traditional Clock

Synchronization".

l The structure of topic "ASON Features" is adjusted.


This document is the fifth release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 04,


l The description of N3EAS2 boards is added into the "Classification of the Boards" and

"Data Processing Boards" chapters.

lThe description of ERPS is added into the "Network Level Protection" chapter.

l The description of ECC ping and traceroute is added into the "OAM Information

Interworking" chapter.

l The description of N2EFT8 and N2EFT8A boards is added into the "Classification of the

Boards" and "Data Processing Boards" chapters.


This document is the fourth release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 03,


Based on version V100R010C00, version V100R010C01 has the following new functions and

features:

l The "AAA Management Mode" and "Accounting Management" chapters are added.

Other new contents:

l The description of the support for 2300 W power consumption is added.





iv




This document is the third release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 02,


l The "License" section is added.


This document is the second release of the product version V100R010. Based on the release 01,


l The "Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board" section is modified.


This document is the first release of the product version V100R010. Based on the document

release of the product version V100R009, the following contents are added or optimized:

l The N1FXCSA, N4SLD64, N4SFD64, N4SLO16, N4SL64, N4SF64, N4SLQ16,

N3SLH41 and N1EFP0 boards are added.l The structure of the "Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board" section is optimized.


This document is the seventh release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release

06, the following contents are added or optimized:

l The description about that the N2PSXCSA board can only be used with the N4GSCC board

is added in "Board Classification".

l The description of the enhanced subrack in "Power Supply Specification" is changed.

l The description in "Package Loading" is changed.

l The technical specifications in this document are optimized.

l The inter-document links in "Syslog Management" are deleted.





v




This document is the sixth release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release 05,


l The N2PSXCSA board is added.

l In section "Package Loading", the description of N4GSCC is deleted.

l The structure of the "Data Features" section is optimized.

l The "High Precise Timing" section is deleted.

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version

V100R009This document is the fifth release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release 04,


l The structure of the "Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board" section is optimized.


This document is the fourth release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release 03,the following contents are added or optimized:

l In section "Package Loading", the description of the N4GSCC is deleted.

l In section "High Precise Timing", the description of the N4GSCC is added for the

V100R009C04 product version.

l In section "SDH Processing Boards", the interface type of N1SLT1 board is modified.

l In sections "Environmental Specification" and "Environment Requirement", the

description of the specifications is modified.

l In section "Specifications of the Subrack", the typical power consumption and the typical

configuration are modified.

l The description of "1000BASE-EX" is changed to "1000BASE-VX".

l The slot layouts are optimized.

l In section "Microwave Radio Performance", the description and the structure are optimized.

l In section "High Precise Timing", the description of theories and applications are

optimized.





vi




This document is the third release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release 02,


l The N5GSCC board is deleted.

l The N1IDL4A and N1IDQ1A board are added for the V100R009C04 product version.

l The description of STM-4 ring MSP is added to the "MSP Ring".

l Several bugs in this document of the previous release are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-03-30) Based on Product Version

V100R009This document is the second release of the product version V100R009. Based on the release 01,


l The N3SLT1, N3SLD41, and N3SLN boards are deleted.

l The slots supported by the N1EMS2 (without an interface board) are changed.

l Several bugs in this document of the previous release are fixed.


This document is the first release of the product version V100R009. Based on document release

of the product version V100R008, the following contents are added or optimized:

l The N1IFSD1, N1RPWR, N3SLT1, N3SLO1, N1SLO16, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41,

N1RPC01, N1RPC02, N5EFS0, N3EFS4, N3EGS2, N4EGS4, N2EGT2, N1EFS0A,

N1EMS2, N1EFF8A, N1ETF8A, N2EAS2, N1PIUA, N5GSCC, N2SXCSA and

N2SXCSB boards are added.

l The following sections are added: "Microwave Technology" and "High-Precision Timing".

l The following sections are deleted: "DCN Features", "Clock" and "Basic Principle".

l The mapping relation between boards and slots in the "Hardware" section are optimized.





vii



Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Network Application....................................................................................................................1

2 Function...........................................................................................................................................4

2.1 Capacity..............................................................................................................................................................6

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity............................................................................................................................6

2.1.2 Microwave Capacity..................................................................................................................................8

2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity.................................................................................................................................8

2.2 Service..............................................................................................................................................................11

2.2.1 Service Type............................................................................................................................................12

2.2.2 Service Access Capacity..........................................................................................................................13

2.3 Interface............................................................................................................................................................14

2.3.1 Service Interfaces....................................................................................................................................14

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces.................................................................................................152.4 Networking Topology.......................................................................................................................................16

2.5 Protection..........................................................................................................................................................18

2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection....................................................................................................................18

2.5.2 Network Level Protection........................................................................................................................19

2.6 Board REG Function........................................................................................................................................20

2.7 ASON Featur es.................................................................................................................................................21

2.8 Built-in WDM Technology..............................................................................................................................21

2.9 Microwave Technology....................................................................................................................................22

2.10 Access of AC Power Supply..........................................................................................................................23

2.11 Synchronization..............................................................................................................................................24

2.11.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization........................................................................................................24

2.12 OAM Information Interworking.....................................................................................................................24

2.13 OAM...............................................................................................................................................................26

2.14 License............................................................................................................................................................26

2.15 Security Management.....................................................................................................................................27

3 Hardware.......................................................................................................................................28

3.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................29

3.2 Cabinet..............................................................................................................................................................30

3.3 Subrack.............................................................................................................................................................32


Product Description Contents



viii



3.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................32

3.3.2 Slot Allocation.........................................................................................................................................33

3.4 Extended Subrack.............................................................................................................................................36

3.5 Boards...............................................................................................................................................................37

3.5.1 Classification of the Boards.....................................................................................................................37

3.5.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards............................................................................................44

3.5.3 SDH Processing Boards...........................................................................................................................45

3.5.4 PDH Processing Boards...........................................................................................................................57

3.5.5 EoS/EoP Boards......................................................................................................................................64

3.5.6 ATM Boards............................................................................................................................................75

3.5.7 RPR Boards.............................................................................................................................................77

3.5.8 WDM Boards...........................................................................................................................................79

3.5.9 Microwave Boards...................................................................................................................................82

3.5.10 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards.........................................................................................................83

3.5.11 Other Boards..........................................................................................................................................85

4 Software Architecture.................................................................................................................87

4.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................................88

4.2 Communication Protocols................................................................................................................................88

4.3 Board Software.................................................................................................................................................89

4.4 NE Software.....................................................................................................................................................89

4.5 Network Management System..........................................................................................................................90

4.6 ASON Software................................................................................................................................................91

5 Data Features................................................................................................................................93

5.1 Ethernet Features..............................................................................................................................................94

5.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards......................................................................................94

5.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards..............................................................................................................106

5.1.3 Application............................................................................................................................................153

5.1.4 Protection...............................................................................................................................................159

5.2 RPR Features..................................................................................................................................................161

5.2.1 Functions...............................................................................................................................................162

5.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................................170

5.2.3 Protection...............................................................................................................................................172

5.3 ATM Features.................................................................................................................................................173

5.3.1 Functions...............................................................................................................................................173

5.3.2 Application............................................................................................................................................182

5.3.3 Protection...............................................................................................................................................185

5.4 DDN Features.................................................................................................................................................186

5.4.1 Functions...............................................................................................................................................186

5.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................................187

5.4.3 Protection...............................................................................................................................................188

5.5 SAN/Video Features.......................................................................................................................................188





ix



6 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................191

6.1 CoS and Tunnels.............................................................................................................................................193

6.1.1 SLA........................................................................................................................................................193

6.1.2 Diamond Services..................................................................................................................................195

6.1.3 Gold Services.........................................................................................................................................200

6.1.4 Silver Services.......................................................................................................................................202

6.1.5 Copper Services.....................................................................................................................................204

6.1.6 Iron Ser vices..........................................................................................................................................204

6.1.7 Tunnels..................................................................................................................................................205

6.2 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................207

6.3 End-to-End Service Configuration.................................................................................................................210

6.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................211

6.5 Crankback Mechanism...................................................................................................................................212

6.6 Service Association........................................................................................................................................212

6.7 Service Optimization......................................................................................................................................214

6.8 Service Migration...........................................................................................................................................214

6.9 Reverting Ser vices to Original Routes...........................................................................................................214

6.10 Presetting the Restoration Trail....................................................................................................................215

6.11 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail.....................................................................................................................215

6.12 Shared Risk Link Group...............................................................................................................................216

6.13 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS............................................................................................................217

6.14 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network...................................................................218

7 Protection....................................................................................................................................2267.1 Equipment Level Protection...........................................................................................................................227

7.1.1 TPS Protection.......................................................................................................................................227

7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units...................................................................228

7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit.........................................................................................................228

7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards.......................................................................................................229

7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................................231

7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards....................................................................................................231

7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit.......................................................................................233

7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit...................................................................................2337.1.9 Intelligent Fans......................................................................................................................................233

7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply............................................................................234

7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions....................................................................234

7.2 Network Level Protection...............................................................................................................................234

7.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................235

7.2.2 MSP Ring..............................................................................................................................................235

7.2.3 SNCP.....................................................................................................................................................236

7.2.4 DNI........................................................................................................................................................240

7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection....................................................................................................244

7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP......................................................................................................................244





x



7.2.7 RPR Protection......................................................................................................................................246

7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection................................................................................................................247

7.2.9 ERPS......................................................................................................................................................248

8 OAM.............................................................................................................................................2508.1 Alarm and Performance Management............................................................................................................251

8.2 ALS Function And Optical Power Management............................................................................................252

8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance..................................................................................................252

8.4 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade.................................................................................................253

8.4.1 Simulation Package Loading and Package Diffusion............................................................................254

8.4.2 Hot Patch...............................................................................................................................................254

8.4.3 NSF........................................................................................................................................................255

8.4.4 Board Version Replacement..................................................................................................................255

8.5 Network Management....................................................................................................................................255

9 Security Management...............................................................................................................257

9.1 AAA Management..........................................................................................................................................258

9.1.1 AAA Management Mode......................................................................................................................258

9.1.2 Authentication Management..................................................................................................................259

9.1.3 Authorization Management...................................................................................................................259

9.1.4 Accounting Management.......................................................................................................................259

9.2 Network Security Management......................................................................................................................260

9.3 System Security Management........................................................................................................................260

9.4 Log Management............................................................................................................................................260

9.4.1 NE Security Log Management..............................................................................................................260

9.4.2 Syslog Management..............................................................................................................................261

10 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................263

10.1 Overall S pecifications of the Equipment......................................................................................................265

10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet...............................................................................................................265

10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack..............................................................................................................266

10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters....................................................................................................................268

10.1.4 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceIEEE 1588v2 Synchronization Performance....................269

10.1.5 Transmission Performance..................................................................................................................26910.1.6 Protection PerformanceProtection Performance of Packet Switching................................................270

10.1.7 Timeslot Numbering............................................................................................................................272

10.1.8 Laser Safety Class...............................................................................................................................273

10.1.9 Environmental Specification...............................................................................................................274

10.2 Parameters S pecified for the Optical Interfaces...........................................................................................275

10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces....................................................................................................................275

10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces....................................................................................................................276

10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces..................................................................................................................277

10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces..................................................................................................................279

10.2.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces..................................................................................................................282





xi



10.2.6 ATM Optical Interfaces.......................................................................................................................283

10.2.7 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces..............................................................................................284

10.2.8 Colored Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................285

10.2.9 Wavelength Allocation........................................................................................................................287

10.3 Ethernet Optical Interfaces...........................................................................................................................288

10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces....................................................................................................................288

10.3.2 DD N Electrical Interfaces....................................................................................................................289

10.3.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces...............................................................................................................290

10.4 Microwave RF Performance.........................................................................................................................290

10.4.1 Radio Work Modes..............................................................................................................................290

10.4.2 IF Performance....................................................................................................................................291

10.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem...................................................................292

10.4.4 Equipment Reliability..........................................................................................................................292

10.4.5 SP ODU...............................................................................................................................................29210.4.6 HP ODU..............................................................................................................................................300

10.5 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces........................................................................................308

10.5.1 Clock Interface Specifications.............................................................................................................308

10.5.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications........................................................................................................309

10.5.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications..........................................................................................................310

10.5.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications..........................................................................................................310

10.5.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications...........................................................................................310

10.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility.....................................................................................................................311

10.7 Safety Certif ication.......................................................................................................................................312

10.8 Environmental Conditions............................................................................................................................313

10.8.1 Environment for Storage.....................................................................................................................313

10.8.2 Environment for Transportation..........................................................................................................315

10.8.3 Environment for Operation..................................................................................................................318

10.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..........................................................................................320

11 Energy Saving and Environment Protection......................................................................326

11.1 Energy Saving...............................................................................................................................................327

11.2 Environment Protection................................................................................................................................327

12 Compliant Standards..............................................................................................................32912.1 ITU-T Recommendations.............................................................................................................................330

12.2 IEEE Standards.............................................................................................................................................333

12.3 IETF Standards.............................................................................................................................................334

12.4 ANSI Standards............................................................................................................................................334

12.5 Environment Related Standards...................................................................................................................335

12.6 EMC Standards.............................................................................................................................................335

12.7 Safety Compliance Standards.......................................................................................................................336

12.8 Protection Standards.....................................................................................................................................337

12.9 ASON Standards...........................................................................................................................................337

12.10 Microwave Standards.................................................................................................................................338





xii



A Glossary......................................................................................................................................341

A.1 Numerics........................................................................................................................................................343

A.2 A....................................................................................................................................................................343

A.3 B.....................................................................................................................................................................345

A.4 C.....................................................................................................................................................................346

A.5 D....................................................................................................................................................................349

A.6 E.....................................................................................................................................................................350

A.7 F.....................................................................................................................................................................352

A.8 G....................................................................................................................................................................354

A.9 H....................................................................................................................................................................354

A.10 I....................................................................................................................................................................355

A.11 J....................................................................................................................................................................356

A.12 L...................................................................................................................................................................356

A.13 M..................................................................................................................................................................358

A.14 N..................................................................................................................................................................359

A.15 O..................................................................................................................................................................360

A.16 P...................................................................................................................................................................361

A.17 Q..................................................................................................................................................................363

A.18 R...................................................................................................................................................................363

A.19 S...................................................................................................................................................................365

A.20 T...................................................................................................................................................................368

A.21 U..................................................................................................................................................................369

A.22 V..................................................................................................................................................................370

A.23 W..................................................................................................................................................................370





xiii



1 Network Application

The OptiX OSN 3500 intelligent optical transmission system (hereinafter referred to as the OptiX

OSN 3500) developed by Huawei is the next-generation intelligent optical transmission

switching equipment.

The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high

efficiency. It integrates the following technologies:

l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

l Ethernet

l RPR(Resilient Packet Ring)

l Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

l Storage area network (SAN)

l Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

l Digital data network (DDN)

l Automatically switched optical network (ASON)

l Microwave Technology

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.


Product Description 1 Network Application



1



Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and the backbone layer of the

metropolitan area network (MAN). The OptiX OSN 3500 can also be networked with the other

OSN equipment to optimize the investment for customers.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the following equipment:

l OptiX OSN 9500

l OptiX OSN 7500

l OptiX OSN 3500 II

l OptiX OSN 2500

l OptiX OSN 2500 REG

l OptiX OSN 1500

l OptiX 2500+(Metro 3000)

l OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000)

Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 3500 in a transmission network.





2



Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . . Microwave

Technology

OptiX OSN 9500

Backbone

layer

OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500

Convergence

layer

Accesslayer

GSM/CDMA/

WCDMA/TD-

SCDMA

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500 II

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500 II

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)

Ethernet

Storage Area Network (SAN)

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA)

Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)

Microwave Technology





3



2 Function

About This Chapter

The equipment has many functions.

2.1 Capacity

The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity, slot access capacity and microwave capacity.

2.2 Service

The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.

2.3 Interface

The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.4 Networking Topology

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings,

ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/

STM-64 level.

2.5 Protection

The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.6 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the REG function.

2.7 ASON FeaturesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the

intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.

2.8 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports a built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several

wavelengths in one fiber.

2.9 Microwave Technology

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It can

work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service

transmission.

2.10 Access of AC Power Supply


Product Description 2 Function



4



An uninterrupted power module (UPM) system supports the access of the 110 V/220 V power,

and converts 110 V/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power to supply power to the equipment.

2.11 Synchronization

The The OptiX OSN 3500 only supports the traditional clock synchronization.

2.12 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking.

2.13 OAM

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the OAM functions at the equipment layer and network layer.

2.14 License

The product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain corresponding

rights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate.

2.15 Security Management

The NMS uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.





5



2.1 Capacity

The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity, slot access capacity and microwave capacity.

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.

Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect boards and the corresponding cross-connect capacities

supported by the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Higher Order

Cross-ConnectCapacity

Lower Order Cross-

Connect Capacity

Access

Capacity ofa SingleSubrack

Remarks

N1GXCSA 40 Gbit/s

(256x256

VC-4s)

5 Gbit/s (32x32 VC-4s,

which are equivalent to

96x96 VC-3s or

2016x2016 VC-12s)

35 Gbit/s

(224x224

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extended

subrack.

N1EXCSA 80 Gbit/s

(512x512

VC-4s)

5 Gbit/s (32x32 VC-4s,


96x96 VC-3s or

2016x2016 VC-12s)

58.75 Gbit/s

(376x376

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extended

subrack.

N1UXCSA 80 Gbit/s

(512x512

VC-4s)

20 Gbit/s (128x128

VC-4s, which are

equivalent to 384x384

VC-3s or 8064x8064

VC-12s)

58.75 Gbit/s

(376x376

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extendedsubrack.

N1UXCSB 80 Gbit/s

(512x512

VC-4s)

20 Gbit/s (128x128

VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 8064x8064

VC-12s)

60 Gbit/s

(384x384

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and can

be connected to

a 1.25 Gbit/s

extended

subrack.





6



Board Higher OrderCross-ConnectCapacity

Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity

AccessCapacity ofa SingleSubrack

Remarks

N1SXCSA 200 Gbit/s

(1280x1280

VC-4s)

20 Gbit/s (128x128

VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 8064x8064

VC-12s)

155 Gbit/s

(992x992

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extended

subrack.

N2PSXCS

A

200 Gbit/s

(1280x1280

VC-4s)

20 Gbit/s (128x128

VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 8064x8064

VC-12s)

155 Gbit/s

(992x992

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extended

subrack.

N1SXCSB 200 Gbit/s

(1280x1280

VC-4s)

20 Gbit/s (128x128

VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 8064x8064

VC-12s)

156.25 Gbit/

s

(1000x1000

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and can

be connected to

a 1.25 Gbit/s

extended

subrack.

N1IXCSA 200 Gbit/s(1280x1280

VC-4s)

40 Gbit/s (256x256VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 16128x16128

VC-12s)

155 Gbit/s(992x992

VC-4s)

This board isused in a main

subrack and

cannot be

connected to an

extended

subrack.

N1IXCSB 200 Gbit/s

(1280x1280

VC-4s)

40 Gbit/s (256x256

VC-4s, which are


VC-3s or 16128x16128

VC-12s)

156.25 Gbit/

s

(1000x1000

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and can

be connected to

a 1.25 Gbit/sextended

subrack.

N1FXCSA 120 Gbit/s

(768x768

VC-4s)

120 Gbit/s (768x768

VC-4s), which are

equivalent to

(2304x2304 VC-3s) or

(48384x48384 VC-12s)

120 Gbit/s

(768x768

VC-4s)

This board is

used in a main

subrack and can

be connected to

a 1.25 Gbit/s

extended

subrack.





7



Board Higher OrderCross-ConnectCapacity

Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity

AccessCapacity ofa SingleSubrack

Remarks

N1XCE - 1.25 Gbit/s (8x8 VC-4s,


24x24 VC-3s or

504x504 VC-12s)

1.25 Gbit/s

(8x8 VC-4s)

This board is

used in an

extended

subrack.

2.1.2 Microwave Capacity

The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the equipment is

different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by different types of the

equipment is also different.

Table 2-2 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of microwave

directions supported by different types of the equipment.

Table 2-2 Microwave capacity of the equipment

Equipment TypeMaximum Number ofConfigured IF Boards

Maximum SupportedMicrowave Capacity

(Channel)

OptiX OSN 3500 10 20

2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity

When the OptiX OSN 3500 uses different cross-connect boards, the access capacities of slots

are different from each other.

For details on the access capacity of slots when different cross-connect boards are used, see

Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6 respectively.





8



Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used

2 . 5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

2 . 5 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 1 G X C S A

N 1 G X C S A

1 0 G b i t / s

2 . 5 G b i t / s

2 . 5 G b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

6 2 2 M b i t / s

G S C C

G S C C

Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used

2 . 5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

2 . 5 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 1 E X C S A

N 1 E X C S A

1 0 G b i t / s

2 . 5 G b i t / s

2 . 5

G b i t / s

G S C C

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2

5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 . 2

5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s o r G S C C





9



Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used

2 . 5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

2 . 5 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 1 U X C S A / B

1 0 G b i t / s

2 . 5 G b i t / s

2 . 5

G b i t / s

G S C C

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2

5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 . 2

5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s

1 . 2 5 G b i t / s o r G S C C

N 1 U X C S A / B

Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used

1 0 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

1 0 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 1 S X C S A / B

2 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

G S C C

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

G S C C

N 1 S X C S A / B





10



Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N2PSXCSA board is used

1 0 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

1 0 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 2 P S X C S A

2 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

G S C C

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

2 0 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

G S C C

N 2 P S X C S A

Figure 2-6 Access capacity of each slot when the N1FXCSA board is used

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

Cable routing

FAN

1 0 G b i t / s

FAN FAN

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT1

SLOT17

SLOT18

N 1 F X C S A

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

G S C C

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

5 G b i t / s

1 0 G b i t / s

G S C C

1 0 G b i t / s

N 1 F X C S A

2.2 Service

The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and many other services.





11



2.2.1 Service Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR,

ATM, DDN and SAN/Video services.

For details about the supported types of services, see Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Types of services supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Service Type Description

SDH services l Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64

l Standard SDH contiguous concatenation services: VC-4-4c/

VC-4-8c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c/AU-3

l Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X≤64),

VC-3-Xv (X≤192), VC-12-Xv (X≤63)

l SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s

PDH services l E1/T1 service

l E3/T3 service

l E4 service

NOTEWith the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing and

demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.

Ethernet services Ethernet service transmission on the platforms of Ethernet over SDH

(EoS) and Ethernet over PDH (EoP)

l Ethernet private line (EPL) service

l Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service

l Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service

l Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service

RPR services l EVPL service

l EVPLAN service

ATM services l Constant bit rate (CBR) service

l Real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) service

l Non real-time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR) service

l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service

l Unspecified bit rate plus (UBR+) service

DDN services l N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service

l Framed E1 service

SAN/Video services l Fiber channel (FC) service

l Fiber connection (FICON) service

l Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service

l Digital video broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-

ASI) service





12



2.2.2 Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and

quantity of the configured boards.

Table 2-4 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services.

The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when only

one specific type of service is accessed.

Table 2-4 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Service Type Maximum Number of ServicesSupported by a Single Subrack

STM-64 standard or concatenated services 12

STM-64 (FEC) services 12


STM-16 (FEC) services 8


STM-1 standard services 240

STM-1 (electrical) services 132

E4 services 32

E3/T3 services 117

E1 services 504

T1 services 504

FE services 180

GE services 56

10GE services 20

STM-1 ATM services 60

STM-4 ATM services 15

N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1-31) 64

Framed E1 services 56

ESCON services 44

FICON/FC100 services 22

FC200 services 8

DVB-ASI services 44





13



2.3 Interface

The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include the SDH service interfaces, PDH service interfaces and several other

service interfaces.

Interface Types

Table 2-5 lists the service interfaces of OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-5 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Interface Type Description

SDH service

interface

STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors and SAA connectors

STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je,

V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f

STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2,

Ls-64.2, V-64.2b, P1L1-2D2STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e

STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692

can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz, and can

directly be interconnected with the WDM equipment.

PDH service

interface

75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

Ethernet service

interface

10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-VX, 1000BASE-SX,

1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-T, 10GBASE-LW,

10GBASE-LR

DDN service

interface

RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, and framed E1 interface

ATM service

interface

STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

E3 interfaces: E3 services are accessed by the E3 board

IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the E1 board





14



Interface Type Description

Storage area

network (SAN)/

Video service

interface

FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, or DVB-ASI service optical

interfaces

NOTE

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, and Ve-4.2 are

optical technical specifications specified by Huawei.

Optical Module Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SFP, eSFP, and single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.

When the board is equipped with a single-fiber bidirectional optical module, the fiber connected

to the optical module can transmit and receive optical signals. Thus, a lot of optical fiber

resources are saved.

NOTE

In the case of different single-fiber bidirectional optical modules, the transmit or receive wavelengths are

different. Thus, the single-fiber directional optical modules at the two ends must be of the same type.

For details about optical modules, see Pluggable Optical/Electrical Module in Hardware

Description.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfacesThe equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.

Table 2-6 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN

3500.

Table 2-6 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500

InterfaceType

Description

Administration

interface

Serial network management/management interface (OAM/F&f)

Four serial broadcast data interfaces (S1-S4)

One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)

One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management (ETH)

One administration serial interface (F&f)

One extended subrack administration interface (EXT)

One commissioning interface (COM)





15



InterfaceType

Description

Orderwire

interface

One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)

Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2)Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast

data interfaces)

Clock interface Two 120-ohm clock input/output interfaces in 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz

clock mode

Two 75-ohm clock input interfaces and two clock output interfaces in 2048

kbit/s or 2048 kHz clock mode

Supports external and line synchronization outputs.

Alarm interface Four-output interface for the alarm indicators on the cabinet

Four-input cascading interface for the alarm indicators on the cabinetSixteen-input and four-output alarm interface

Four-output alarm cascading interface

Microwave IF

interface

One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two cables

to separately connect two ODUs.

Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.

2.4 Networking TopologyThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings,

ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/

STM-64 level.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of

NEs:

l Terminal multiplexer (TM)

l Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)

l Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment

series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.

NOTE

When the equipment is being interconnected, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted

are on the same path at both ends.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a

complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer,

the convergence layer, and the access layer.

l Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected

with the WDM equipment.





16



l Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be

interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.

Table 2-7 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-7 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN equipment series

Networking Mode Topology

1 Chain

2 Ring

3 Tangent rings

4 Intersecting

rings

5 Ring with

chain

6 DNI





17



Networking Mode Topology

7 Hub

8 Mesh

Legends: MADM ADM TM ASON NE

2.5 Protection

The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.

Table 2-8 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-8 Equipment level protection

Object Protected Protection Scheme

PDH TPS

DDN TPS

Ethernet processing unit TPS/PPS/BPS/LAG/DLAG hot backup

ATM 1+1 hot backup

Cross-connect and timing unit 1+1 hot backup





18



Object Protected Protection Scheme

SCC unit 1+1 hot backup

Arbitrary bit rate wavelength

conversion unite

Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective

receiving) and inter-board protection (1+1 hot backup)

Protection for the Microwave

unit

1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 backup

Power interface unit 1+1 hot backup, 1:N centralized backup

Intelligent Fans unit The power supply modules are of mutual backup for

the three fan modules.

Board Under Abnormal

Conditions

Power-Down Protection During Software Loading,

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power

Supply and Board Temperature Detection

NOTEThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.

2.5.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.

Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Network LevelProtection

Protection Scheme

SDH protection Linear MSP

MSP ring

Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork

connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork

connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)

Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection

Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

Optical-path-shared MSP

Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS)

Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) protection

Link state pass through (LPT) protection





19



Network LevelProtection

Protection Scheme

SPT/RSTP protection

Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) protection

ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.6 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the REG function.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. See Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 Hybrid application of ADM and REG

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

REG

SL64 SL64

IN

OUT

SL64

IN

OUT

SL64

OptiX OSN 3500

OUT

IN

SL16 SL16

IN

OUT

SL16

IN

OUT

SL16

PQ1

ADM

OSN

3500

OSN

3500

OSN

3500

OSN

3500

OUT

IN

Table 2-10 lists the boards that support the REG function.

Table 2-10 Boards that support the REG function

Board Description N1SL64 With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback

mode and processes only the regeneration section overhead and

the frame header.

N2SL64 With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.

N4SL64 With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.





20



Board Description

N2SL16, N3SL16 With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.

N2SL16A, N3SL16A With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.

N1SF64, N1SF64A With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.

N4SF64 With the REG function enabled, the board is in RS loopback


the frame header.

For the information about valid slots and optical interfaces supported by the board, see 3.5.3

SDH Processing Boards.

2.7 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the

intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.

The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 3500 are as follows:

l Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.

l Supports service level agreement (SLA).

l Supports mesh networking, mesh protection, and shared mesh restoration trails.

l Provides traffic engineering control to realize traffic balance across the network and

improve the bandwidth utilization.

l Provides distributed mesh protection including real-time rerouting and pre-configuration.

l Supports end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of the network.

NOTE

The ASON software can be enabled or disabled on the OptiX OSN 3500 as required. If the ASON software

is not enabled, the OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the ASON features described in this document.

2.8 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports a built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several

wavelengths in one fiber.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment

are as follows:

l

Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can beadded or dropped.





21



l Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.

l The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and

thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.

l The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliantstandard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently

transmitted.

l Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with

other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.

l Supports the STM-16 high-density colored optical interface, which realizes the direct

interconnection between the equipment and the optical multiplexer equipment. Thus, the

optical fiber resources are saved.

l Supports the 10 Gbit/s DWDM wavelength-tunable optical interface.

l Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a

long distance.l Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a

long distance.

l Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

2.9 Microwave Technology

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate frequency. It can

work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve wireless service

transmission.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of the

microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 Processing flow of the service signals

Cross-

connect

board

Microwave

IF boardODU

RF signalIF signalBaseband

signal

Antenna

Baseband

signal

Service

interface

board

PDH/SDH/Ethernet

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following microwave functions:

l Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and modulation

mode can be set through software.

l Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the product to

interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the microwave frames based

on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX RTN 600.

l HP ODU (that is, standard power ODU) and SP ODU (that is, high power ODU).

l 1+1 protection and N+1 protection.

l Microwave lower order SNCP.





22



l Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.

2.10 Access of AC Power Supply

An uninterrupted power module (UPM) system supports the access of the 110 V/220 V power,

and converts 110 V/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power to supply power to the equipment.

The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 1600 W. The EPS75-4815AF

power system is 3U high. Figure 2-9 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.

Figure 2-9 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system

The UPM power box can be directly installed in the 19-inch cabinet or the ETSI cabinet.

The storage batteries of the UPM work with one EPS75-4815AF power system. When theexternal AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110

V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To

supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment, only one power system is required to be connected

to the batteries.

The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five

rectifier modules and one monitoring module.

NOTE

The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Hence, the batteries need to be configured separately.

If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment

cabinet is reserved for the batteries.

Table 2-11 provide the functions and features of the UPM.

Table 2-11 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Function andFeature

EPS75-4815AF

Hot-swappable

function

The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When

you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can

still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is

improved.





23



Function andFeature

EPS75-4815AF

Storage battery

protection function

The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the

mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment

automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the

equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a

capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.

Loading capacity The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.

Lightning-proof

function

The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA

lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier

module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-

B light arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the

power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct

lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.

2.11 Synchronization

The The OptiX OSN 3500 only supports the traditional clock synchronization.

2.11.1 Traditional Clock Synchronization

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the traditional clock synchronization functions.

l SSM clock protocol

l Tributary retiming

l Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock outputs and inputs

l External clock output shutdown

l Line clock source

l Tributary clock source

l Three working modes are as follows:

– Tracing mode

– Holdover mode

– Free-run mode

2.12 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking.

Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 3500 to transparently transmit

the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to

transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 3500.

l HWECC





24



l IP over DCC

l OSI over DCC

NOTE

The OptiX OSN equipment supports ECC ping and traceroute functions for fast locating of faults on ECC

channels.

Table 2-12 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-12 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500

DCC Allocation N1GSCC N3GSCC/N4GSCC

Channel type Supports the D1-D1, D1-D3 and

D4-D12 channel types.

Supports the D1-D1, D1-D3,

D4-D12 and GCCM_24 channel

types.

Operation

mode

Mode 1 Supports 40 D1-D3 channels. Supports 160 D1-D3 channels.

Mode 2 Supports 10 D1-D3 channels.

Supports 10 D4-D12 channels.


















Mode 7 - Supports 70 D1-D3 channels.





N3GSCC: Supports 130 D1-D3

channels.

N4GSCC: Supports 150 D1-D3

channels.

Mode

10

- Supports 30 D1-D1 channels.







25



DCC Allocation N1GSCC N3GSCC/N4GSCC

Mode

11

- Supports 24 D1-D1 channels.



Supports 8 GCCM_24 channels.

Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.

Default mode Mode 1

WARNING

When interconnected with the OptiX 155/622H(Metro 1000), the OptiX OSN 3500 does not support

the D4-D12 channel type if the DCN networking technology that is used is IP over DCC. Hence,

if the D4-D12 channel type is used, communication is interrupted.

NOTE

Currently, the boards that support the 8 GCCM_24 channels are N4SLD64, N4SF64, N4SFD64, N4SL64,

N4SLO16, and N4SLQ16. If the equipment does not house a board that supports the 8 GCCM_24 channels,

the system changes to the 9-byte DCC mode.

2.13 OAMThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the OAM functions at the equipment layer and network layer.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the following OAM functions at the equipment layer:

l Alarm and performance management: supports the reporting of alarms and performance

events. The user can discover and locate the faults on the equipment and on the network in

a timely manner.

l Laser and optical power management: supports the optical power management at the SDH

optical interface and the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

l Fault locating and equipment maintenance: provides multiple maintenance measures such

as PRBS, ETH-OAM, and TCM. The user can monitor, debug, troubleshoot the equipment

conveniently.

l Expansion and upgrade: supports the network expansion through board replacement.

Supports the in-service software upgrade by using the simulation package loading,

diffusion loading, and hot patch loading methods.

The OAM functions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500 at the network layer can be realized by

using the NMS.

2.14 License

The product of this version is released with a license. That is, customers can obtain correspondingrights committed by the supplier based on the license certificate.





26



After you purchase the license, you need to load or update the license file.

l At the deployment phase: You can configure or use the new features of this version only

after the license file of this version is loaded.

l At the maintenance phase: You can query the license status and use period on the NMS;

you need to apply for a new license after the SCC boards are replaced; the services with

the features controlled can be queried and deleted but cannot be added, modified, or enabled

after the licence expires; you need to purchase a new license if the features that you purchase

are increased.

If the SCC boards are replaced, the equipment serial number (ESN) of the license will be

changed, and the license continues to be valid but will expire after 60 days. During the 60-day

period, the functions of the license are fully provided, but a warning will be displayed, prompting

you to apply for a new license. Therefore, after the working SCC boards are replaced, it is

recommended that you immediately apply for a new license and load the license file onto the

SCC boards.

In the case of the license of this version, the features are not controlled. Therefore, you can useall the features supported by this version after you obtain the authorization of this license.

NOTE

By default, the version license function is disabled.

2.15 Security Management

The NMS uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.

l Authentication Management

lAuthorization Management

l Network Security Management

l System Security Management

l Log Management

For the details of security management, refer to the Security Management .





27



3 Hardware

About This Chapter

The equipment can house several types of boards and can reside in several types of cabinets.

3.1 Overview

The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.

3.2 Cabinet

The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power

supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power.

3.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.

3.4 Extended Subrack

The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services or 24 x E3/

T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services

or 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services.

3.5 Boards

The equipment supports different types of boards.


Product Description 3 Hardware



28



3.1 Overview

The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.

Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment

7

7

W

H

D

1

2

3

4

5

6

87

1. DC PDU 2. Side panel 3. Cable distribution plate 4. Orderwire phone fixing frame

5. Subrack 6. Cabinet 7. fiber management tray 8. Front door

The OptiX OSN 3500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame where the

cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following

units:

l SDH interface unit





29



l PDH interface unit

l DDN interface unit

l Ethernet interface unit

l

Resilient packet ring unitl ATM interface unit

l SAN interface unit

l WDM unit

l SDH cross-connect matrix unit

l Synchronous timing unit

l SCC unit

l Overhead processing unit

l Auxiliary interface unit

l Power interface unit

l Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit

Figure 3-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Figure 3-2 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

STM-N opticalsignal

SDH signal

Ethernet signal

ATM signal

C r o s s - c o n n e c t

m a t r i x

S D H i n t e r f a c e

u n i t

O v

e r h e a d

p r o

c e s s i n g

u n i t

S y n c h r o n o u s

t i m

i n g u n i t

A

u x i l i a r y

I n t e

r f a c e u n i t

S C

C

u n i t

S D H / P D H

/ E t h e r n e t /

A T M / D D N i n t e r f a c e

b o

a r d

DDN signal

PDH signal

3.2 Cabinet

The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power

supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access -48 V or -60 V power.

Figure 3-3 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.





30



Figure 3-3 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet

T63 Cabinet N63E Cabinet

600 mm ETSI cabinets are currently available in only one type: N66T cabinets. Figure 3-4 shows

the appearance of an N66T cabinet.





31



Figure 3-4 Appearance of an N66T cabinet

3.3 Subrack

The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.

3.3.1 Structure

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the processing

board area, interface board area, fan area, and cable routing area.

Figure 3-5 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.





32



Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

1

2

3

4

W

H

D

5

1. Interface board area 2. Fan area

3. Processing board area 4. Cable routing area

5. Mounting ear -

The functions of the areas are as follows:

l Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

l Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the

equipment.

l Processing board area: These areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500.

l Cable routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.

l Mounting ear: This component fixes the subrack in the subrack.

NOTE

The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board provides physical

interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical signals or electrical signals to

the corresponding processing board.

3.3.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer,

where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots

are available, is the slot area for processing boards.

Figure 3-6 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.





33



Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

XCS

FAN

SLOT 38

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

S

LOT19

S

LOT20

S

LOT21

S

LOT22

S

LOT23

S

LOT24

S

LOT25

S

LOT26

SLOT1

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

S

LOT27

S

LOT28

S

LOT29

S

LOT30

S

LOT31

S

LOT32

S

LOT33

S

LOT34

S

LOT35

S

LOT36

S

LOT37

FAN

SLOT 39

FAN

SLOT 40

XCS

PIU

PIU

AUX

GSCC

GSCC

Slot Area for Interface Boards

Slots for the interface boards: slots 19-26 and 29-36

Slot Area for Processing Boards

Slots for the processing boards: slots 1-8 and 11-17

Other Slots

l Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9-10

l Slots for the SCC boards: slots 17-18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board)

l Slots for the PIU boards: slots 27-28

l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37

l Slots for the fan boards: slots 38-40

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards

Table 3-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards.





34



Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing

boards

Slots forProcessing

Boards

Slots for Interface Boards

Slot 2 Slots 19 and 20








Paired Slots

If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots are paired

slots. Paired slots achieves automatic transparent transmission of overhead bytes such as K bytes,

D bytes, and E1 overhead bytes. This improves multiplex section protection (MSP) switching

performance and protects orderwire and DCC communication with other NEs even after the

system control board on the local NE cannot be detected. Table 3-2 lists the paired slots.

Table 3-2 Paired slots

Cross-Connect Capacity Paired Slots

40 Gbit/s (Slot 3, Slot 16)

(Slot 4, Slot 15)

(Slot 5, Slot 14)

(Slot 6, Slot 13)

(Slot 7, Slot 12)

(Slot 8, Slot 11)

80 Gbit/s, 200 Gbit/s or 120 Gbit/s (Slot 2, Slot 17)

(Slot 3, Slot 16)

(Slot 4, Slot 15)

(Slot 5, Slot 14)

(Slot 6, Slot 13)





35



Cross-Connect Capacity Paired Slots

(Slot 7, Slot 12)

(Slot 8, Slot 11)

3.4 Extended Subrack

The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services or 24 x E3/

T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services

or 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services.

NOTE

The extended subrack supports a maximum of 24xE3/T3 signals, because the access capability of the XCE

board is 1.25 Gbit/s.

Each OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports only one extended subrack. Table 3-3 lists the

configuration of the extended subrack.

Table 3-3 Configuration of the extended subrack

Subrack Main Subrack Extended Subrack

Cross-connect

and synchronous

timing board

The N1UXCSB, N1SXCSB or

N1IXCSB board is required. 1

+1 hot backup is recommended.

The N1XCE board is required. 1+1

hot backup is recommended.

SCC The N1GSCC, N3GSCC and N4GSCC board is required. 1+1

hot backup is recommended.

The SCC board need not beconfigured.

PDH Service processing boards are

configured according to the

actual requirements.

Support N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1,

N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1PL3,

N1PD3, N1PL3A.

Service

processing board

Service processing boards are

configured according to the

actual requirements.

Support N1D75S, N1D12S,

N1D12B, N1C34S, N1D34S,

N1TSB8, N1TSB4, N1LWX, BA2,

BPA, N1DCU, N2DCU.

Power board This board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended.

It is required. 1+1 hot backup isrecommended.

N1AUX This board is required. It is required.

FAN This board is required. It is required.

The N1UXCSB board of the main subrack and the N1XCE board of the extended subrack are

connected by two cables to achieve 1+1 protection. The EXT interface on the N1AUX board of

the main subrack is connected to the "EXT" interface of the N1AUX board of the extended

subrack to transmit the network management information. When the N1AUX board is used inan extended subrack, the J9 jumper cap of the N1AUX board should be removed.





36



Figure 3-7 shows the connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack. If the

N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is used, cables are connected in the same way. Replace only the

N1UXCSB board in Figure 3-7 with the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board.

Figure 3-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack

19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

FAN FAN FAN

P I U

P I U

U X C S B

U X C S B

A U X

G S C C

E X B

E X A

E X T

G S C C

FAN FAN FAN

P I U

P I U

X C E

X C E

A U X

E X B

E X A

E X T

Primary subrack Extended subrack

13 14 1516 17 18 51

2122232425 26 27 28 29 30313233343536 37 69 70717273747576 77 78 7980818283848586 87

E X B

E X A

E X B

E X A

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

NOTE

The slots illustrated in the figure are the logical slots where the boards can be installed on the NMS. The

logical slot ID of a board on the extended subrack is equal to the corresponding physical slot ID plus 50.

3.5 Boards

The equipment supports different types of boards.

3.5.1 Classification of the Boards

The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards, and auxiliary

boards according to the functions of the boards.

SDH Boards

NOTE

For details on the board version replacement relationship between boards, see Board Version Replacement

in the Hardware Description.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4,

and STM-1 rates.

Table 3-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.





37



Table 3-4 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports

Board Description Board Description

N1SL64,

N2SL64, N4SL64

1xSTM-64 optical interface

board

N1SLD4,

N2SLD4


board

N1SF64,

N1SF64A,

N4SF64


board (with the forward

error correction (FEC)

function)

N1SLD4A 2xSTM-4 optical interface

board

N1SLD64

and

N4SLD64


board

N1SLT1 12xSTM-1 optical interface

board12xSTM-1 optical

interface board

N1SL16,

N2SL16,

N3SL16


board

N1SLQ1,

N2SLQ1


board

N1SL16A,

N2SL16A,

N3SL16A


board

N1SLQ1A 4xSTM-1 optical interface

board

N1SLD16 2xSTM-16 optical interface

board

N1SL1, N2SL1 1xSTM-1 optical interface

board

N1SLQ16,

N2SLQ16,

N4SLQ16


board

N1SL1A 1xSTM-1 optical interface

board

N1SF16 1xSTM-16 optical interface

board (with the out-band

FEC function)

N1SLH1 16xSTM-1 signal

processing board

N1SLO16 8xSTM-16 optical interface

board

N1SEP1 2xSTM-1 line processing

board when the interfaces

are available on the front

panel

8xSTM-1 line processing

board when the interfaces

are available on thecorresponding interface

board

N1SL4,

N2SL4,

N1SL4A


board

N2SLO1,

N3SLO1


board

N1SLQ4,

N2SLQ4,

N1SLQ4A


board

N3SLQ41 4xSTM-4/STM-1 optical

interface board

N1EU08 8xSTM-1 electrical

interface board

N1OU08 8xSTM-1 optical/ electrical

interface board (LC)





38



N2OU08 8xSTM-1 optical interface

board (SC)

N1EU04 4xSTM-1 electrical

interface board

PDH Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different

impedances.

Table 3-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-5 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


N1PQ1,

N2PQ1

63xE1 service processing board N2PQ3 12xE3/T3 service processing

board

N1PQM 63xE1/T1 service processing

board

N1DX1 DDN service accessing and

converging board

N1PL3,

N2PL3

3xE3/T3 service processing

board

N1DXA DDN service converging and

processing board

N1PL3A,

N2PL3A


board (The interfaces are

available on the front panel.)

N1SPQ4,

N2SPQ4

4xE4/STM-1 electrical

processing board

N1PD3,

N2PD3


board

N1MU04 4xE4/STM-1 electrical

interface board

N1D75S 32xE1 switching access board

(75 ohms)

N1D34S 6xE3/T3 switching access

board

N1C34S 3xE3/T3 switching access

board

N1D12S 32xE1/T1 switching access

board (120 ohms)

N1D12B 32xE1/T1 access board (120

ohms)

N1DM12 DDN service interface board

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface

protection switching board

N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface

protection switching board

EoS/EoP Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS boards with the transparent transmission and switching

functions.

Table 3-6 lists the EoS/EoP Boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.





39



Table 3-6 EoS/EoP Boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


N1EFT8,

N2EFT8

8xFE or 16xFE transparent

transmission board

N1EMS2 2xGE and 16xFE transparent

transmission and converging board

N1EFT8A,

N2EFT8A

8xFE transparent

transmission board

N1EGS4,

N3EGS4,

N4EGS4

4xGE switching and

processing board

N1EGT2,

N2EGT2

2xGE transparent

transmission board

N1EFS0,

N2EFS0,

N4EFS0,

N5EFS0

8xFE switching and

processing board

N1EFS0A 16xFE switching and

processing board

N1EFS4,

N2EFS4, N3EFS4

4xFE switching and

processing board

N2EGS2,

N3EGS2

2xGE switching and

processing board

N1MST4 4-port multi-service

transparent transmission

board

N1EMS4 4xGE and 16xFE transparent

transmission and converging

board

N1EAS2,

N3EAS2

2-port 10xGE switching and

processing board

N1EFP0 8-port PDH-based Ethernet

switching and processing

board

N1ETS8 8x10/100M Ethernet twisted

pair interface switching board

N1EFF8,

N1EFF8A

8x100M Ethernet optical

interface board

N1ETF8,

N1ETF8A

8x100M Ethernet twisted pair

interface board

ATM Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple ATM boards.

Table 3-7 lists the ATM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-7 ATM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


N1ADQ1 4xSTM-1 ATM service

processing board

N1ADL4 1xSTM-4 ATM service

processing board

N1IDQ1,

N1IDQ1A

4xSTM-1 ATM service

processing board

N1IDL4,

N1IDL4A

1xSTM-4 ATM service

processing board





40



RPR Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple RPR boards.

Table 3-8 lists the RPR Boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-8 RPR Boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


N2EGR2 2xGE ring processing board N2EMR0 12xFE and 1xGE ring

processing board

Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect boards thathave different cross-connect capacities.

Table 3-9 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500

supports.

Table 3-9 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


N1GXCSA General cross-connect

and synchronous

timing board

N1SXCSB Super cross-connect and

synchronous timing board

(connected to the extended

subrack)

N1EXCSA Enhanced cross-

connect and

synchronous timing

board

N1IXCSA Infinite cross-connect and


N1UXCSA Ultra cross-connect

and synchronous

timing board

N1IXCSB Infinite cross-connect and


(connected to the extended

subrack)

N1UXCSB Ultra cross-connectand synchronous

timing board

(connected to the

extended subrack)

N1XCE Cross-connect and timing board for the extended

subrack

N1SXCSA Super cross-connect

and synchronous

timing board

N1GSCC,

N3GSCC,

N4GSCC

Intelligent system control

and communication board





41




N2PSXCSA Super cross-connect

and timing board

(supporting the packet

feature)

- -

N1FXCSA Full cross-connect and

synchronous timing

board

- -

NOTEThe N2PSXCSA can work with the N4GSCC only. The PSXCSA board does not support the packet feature

on this version. If the packet feature is required, upgrade the board software and NE software to the

corresponding versions that support the packet feature.

Auxiliary Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface board and

fan board.

Table 3-10 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-10 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports

Board Description

N1AUX System auxiliary interface board

N1FAN Fan board

WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing board

and optical amplifier board.

Table 3-11 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-11 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports


TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/

drop multiplexing board

N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/


N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate

wavelength conversion

board

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/


TN11OBU1,

TN12OBU1

Optical booster amplifier

board





42




TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/


N1FIB Filter isolating board

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board

- -

Microwave Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board and

microwave power board.

Table 3-12 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-12 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports

Board Description

N1IFSD1 Dual-port IF board

N1RPWR 6-channel ODU power board

Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards.

Table 3-13 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX

OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-13 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX OSN

3500 supports


N1BPA and

N2BPA

Optical booster and

pre-amplifier board

N1COA, 61COA, and

62COA

Case-shaped optical

amplifier

N1BA2 Optical booster

amplifier board

N1DCU, N2DCU Dispersion

compensation board

N1RPC01 Forward Raman

driving board

(external)

N1RPC02 Backward Raman

driving board

(external)

Power Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface board.





43



Table 3-14 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports.

Table 3-14 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 3500 supports

Board Description

UPM Uninterruptible power module

N1PIU Power interface board

N1PIUA Power interface board (This board can be used in the enhanced

subrack that consumes 1100 W high power.)

N1PIUB Power interface board (This board can be used in the enhanced

subrack that consumes 2300 W high power.)

3.5.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports various cross-connect and system control boards.

Table 3-15 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots on the OptiX

OSN 3500.

Table 3-15 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots on the OptiX OSN

3500

Board Valid Slots

N1GXCSA Slots 9 and 10

N1EXCSA Slots 9 and 10

N1UXCSA Slots 9 and 10

N1UXCSB Slots 9 and 10

N1SXCSA,

N2PSXCSA

Slots 9 and 10

N1SXCSB Slots 9 and 10

N1IXCSA Slots 9 and 10

N1IXCSB Slots 9 and 10

N1FXCSA Slots 9 and 10

N1XCE Slots in the extended subrack: slots 59 and 60

N1GSCC,

N3GSCC,

N4GSCC

Slots 17 and 18





44



3.5.3 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.

Table 3-16 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interfaces for the OptiX

OSN 3500.

Table 3-16 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode

Interface Type Connector

N1SLD64 Valid slots when the cross-

connect capacity is 200 Gbit/

s: Slots 7-8 and 11-12

Valid slots when the cross-


s: Not supported


connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s:

Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-64.1, S-64.2b LC




Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 120 Gbit/

s: Not supported



Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-64.1, S-64.2b LC

N1SL64 Valid slots when the cross-

connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: Slots 7-8 and 11-12






Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available onthe front

panel

I-64.1, I-64.2,

S-64.2b, L-64.2b,Le-64.2, Ls-64.2,

V-64.2b

LC





45










s: Not supported



slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-64.1, I-64.2,

S-64.2b, L-64.2b,

Le-64.2, Ls-64.2,

V-64.2b

LC



s: Slots 5-8, 11-14






Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

V-64.2b, I-64.1,

S-64.2b and

P1L1-2D2

LC

N1SF64,

N1SF64A









Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

Ue-64.2c,

Ue-64.2d,

Ue-64.2e

LC





46





N4SF64 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 7-8, 11-12, 5-6, and

13-14






Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

Ue-64.2c,

Ue-64.2d,

Ue-64.2e

LC

N4SFD64 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 7-8 and 11-12



s: Not supported



Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

Ue-64.2c,

Ue-64.2d,

Ue-64.2e

LC

N1SLQ16,

N2SLQ16



s: Slots 1-4 and 15-16 (two

optical interfaces can be

configured), slots 5-8 and

11-14 (four optical interfaces

can be configured)


connect capacity is 120 Gbit/s: Slots 1-3 and 16 (two optical

interfaces can be configured),

and slots 4-8 and 11-15 (four


configured)



Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-16, S-16.2,

L-16.1, L-16.2

LC





47





N4SLQ16 Valid slots when the cross-




configured), Slots 5-8 and


can be configured)



s: Slots 1-3 and 16 (two optical




configured)



Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-16, S-16.2,

L-16.1, L-16.2

LC





s: Not supported



Slots 7-8 and 11-12



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-16, S-16.1,

L-16.1, L-16.2

LC

N1SL16A,

N2SL16A,

N3SL16A









Slots 5-8 and 11-14



Slots 6-8 and 11-13

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-16, S-16.1,

L-16.1, L-16.2

LC





48





N1SL16,

N2SL16,

N3SL16









Slots 5-8 and 11-14



Slots 6-8 and 11-13

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je,

V-16.2Je,

U-16.2Je

LC

N1SLO16,

N4SLO16






s: Not supported



Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-16, S-16.1,

L-16.1, L-16.2

LC

N1SF16 Valid slots when the cross-








Slots 5-8 and 11-14



Slots 6-8 and 11-13

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

Ue-16.2c,

Ue-16.2d,

Ue-16.2f

LC





49





N1SLQ4,

N2SLQ4,

N1SLQ4A







can be configured)







configured)



Slots 1-4 and 15-16 (two




can be configured)



Slots 1-5 and 14-16 (one

optical interface can beconfigured), and slots 6-8 and


can be configured)

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2

LC

N1SLD4,

N2SLD4,

N1SLD4A









Slots 1-8 and 11-17




optical interface can be

configured), and slots 6-8 and

11-13 (two optical interfaces

can be configured)

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2

LC





50





N1SL4,

N2SL4,

N1SL4A









Slots 1-8 and 11-17



Slots 1-8 and 11-16

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2

LC

N3SLH41 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 5-8 and 11-16 (all the


configured)






Not supported



Slots 8 and 11

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

S-1.1, L-1.1,

S-4.1

LC





51





N3SLQ41 Valid slots when the cross-

connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s

or 80 Gbit/s: Slots 1-4 and

15-16 (two optical interfaces

can be configured), slots 5-8

and 11-14 (four optical

interfaces can be configured)





slots 4-8 and 11-15 (four


configured)



Slots 1-8 and 11-16







can be configured)

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1.1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2, I-4, S-4.1,

L-4.1, L-4.2,

Ve-4.2

LC

N1SLH1 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 2-5 and 13-16 (16


configured)






Not supported



Not supported

The eight-

optical-

interface

board

N1OU08 is

used.

- -

The eight-

optical-

interface

board

N2OU08 is

used.

- -

The

8xSTM-1

electrical

interface

board

N1EU08 is

used.

- -





52





N1SLT1 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 1-4 and 15-16 (up to

eight optical interfaces can be


11-14 (up to 12 optical




s: Slots 1-3 and 16 (up to eight







Slots 1-4 and 15-16 (up to

eight optical interfaces can be






Slots 1-5 and 14-16 (up to four

optical interfaces can beconfigured), slots 6-8 and



Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

S-1.1, L-1.1,

L-1.2

LC





53





N2SLO1 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 1-8 and 11-17 (eight


configured)



s: Slots 1-8 and 11-16 (eight


configured)



Slots 1-8 and 11-17 (eight


configured)



Slots 1-5 and 14-16 (four



11-13 (eight optical interfaces

can be configured)

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1.1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2

LC

N3SLO1 Valid slots when the cross-

connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: Slots 1-8 and 11-17 (eight


configured)






Slots 1-8 and 11-17 (eight


configured)



Slots 1-5 and 14-16 (four



11-13 (eight optical interfaces

can be configured)

Interfaces


panel

I-1.1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,Ve-1.2

LC





54





N1SLQ1,

N2SLQ1,

N1SLQ1A









Slots 1-8 and 11-17



Slots 1-8 and 11-16

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2

LC

N1SL1,

N2SL1,

N1SL1A









Slots 1-8 and 11-17



Slots 1-8 and 11-16

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

L-1.2, Ve-1.2

LC

N1SEP1

(without the

interface

board)

Slots 1-6 and 13-16 Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

75-ohm STM-1

electrical

interface

SMB

N1SEP1 (with

the interface

board)

Slots 2-5 and 13-16 The four-

electrical-

interface

board

N1EU04 is

used.

- -

The eight-

optical-

interface

board

N1OU08 is

used.

- -





55





The eight-

optical-

interface

board

N2OU08 is

used.

- -

The eight-

electrical-

interface

board

N1EU08 is

used.

- -

N1EU04 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,and 35

Interfacesavailable on

the front

panel

75-ohm STM-1electrical

interface

SMB

N1EU08 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s:

Slot 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

75-ohm STM-1

electrical

interface

SMB

N1OU08 Valid slots when the cross-


s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36


connect capacity is 120 Gbit/s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1

optical interface

LC





56







s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

75-ohm STM-1

electrical

interface

SAA



s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



s: Slots 19-26 and 29-36



Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35



Not supported

Interfaces

available on

the front

panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1

optical interface

SC

3.5.4 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.

Valid SlotsTable 3-17 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-18 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500.





57



Table 3-17 PDH processing boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode InterfaceType

Connector

N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4

Slots 2-5 and 13-16 Interfaces availableon the 4 x electrical

interface board

N1MU04

- -

N1PL3,

N2PL3

Valid slots when the

cross-connect capacity is

200 Gbit/s: slots 2-5,

13-16 (slots in the

extended subrack: slots

52-55, 63-66)


cross-connect capacity is120 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and

13-16




13-16 (slots in the


52-55, 63-66)



40 Gbit/s: slots 2-5 and13-16

Interfaces available

on the 3 x electrical

interface switching

board N1C34S

- -

N1PL3A,

N2PL3A

(without

the

interface

board)




11-17 (slots in the


51-55, 63-66)



120 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and

11-16




11-17 (slots in the


51-55, 63-66)




11-16


on the front panel

75-ohm E3/T3

electrical

interface

SMB





58




Connector

N1PD3,

N2PD3




13-16 (slots in the


52-55, 63-66)




13-16




13-16 (slots in the


52-55, 63-66)




13-16



interface switching

board N1D34S

- -

N2PQ3 Slots 2-5 and 13-16 Interfaces available


interface switching

board N1D34S

- -

N1PQ1

(A/B),

N2PQ1

(A/B)




13-16 (slots in the


51-55 and 63-66)




13-16

Valid slots when thecross-connect capacity is


13-16 (slots in the


51-55 and 63-66)




13-16


on the 32-channel

electrical interface

switching board

N1D12S/N1D75S

- -





59




Connector

N1PQM Valid slots when the



13-16 (slots in the


51-31, 63-66)




13-16




13-16 (slots in the


51-31, 63-66)




13-16


on the 32-channel

electrical interface

switching board

N1D12S and

N1D12B

- -

N1DX1 Slots 1-5 and 13-16 Interfaces available

on the N x 64 kbit/s

interface board

N1DM12

- -

N1DXA Valid slots when the



11-17




11-16



80 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and11-17




11-16

- - -





60



Table 3-18 Interface boards corresponding to the PDH processing boards and their valid slots

in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slot InterfaceType

Connector

N1DM

12

Slots 19-26 and 29-36 RS449,

EIA530,

EIA530-A, V.

35, V.24, X.

21, Framed E1

DB28, DB44

N1TS

B8



slots 19, 20, 35, 36 (slots in the

extended subrack: slots 69, 85)


connect capacity is 120 Gbit/s:slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35



slots 19, 20, 35, 36 (slots in the

extended subrack: slots 69, 85)



slots 19, 20, 35 and 36

- -

N1TSB4 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s:

slots 19, 35 (slots in the extended

subrack: slots 69, 85)



slots 19, 35








- -

N1MU

04

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35

75-ohm E4/

STM-1

electrical

interface

SMB





61




Connector

N1C34

S



slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

(slots in the extended subrack:

slots 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83 and

85)



slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

(slots in the extended subrack:

slots 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83,

and 85)



slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33,

and 35

75-ohm E3/T3

electrical

interface

SMB

N1D34

S



slots 19-26, 29-36 (slots in the

extended subrack: slots 69-76,

79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36Valid slots when the cross-




79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36

75-ohm E3/T3

electrical

interface

SMB





62




Connector

N1D75

S





79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36





79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36

75-ohm E1

interface

DB44

N1D12

S





79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36Valid slots when the cross-




79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36

120-ohm E1

interface

DB44





63




Connector

N1D12

B





79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36





79-86)



slots 19-26 and 29-36

120-ohm E1

interface

DB44

3.5.5 EoS/EoP Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports EoS/EoP boards.

Table 3-19 lists the EoS/EoP boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces for the OptiX OSN

3500.

Table 3-20 lists the EoS/EoP interface boards corresponding to the data processing boards, their

valid slots, and their interfaces for the OptiX OSN 3500.





64



Table 3-19 EoS/EoP boards, their valid slots, and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500


InterfaceType

Connector

N2EFS0, N4EFS0


s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s)Valid slots when the cross-


slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

The8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

N1EAS2 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 5-8 and 11-14 (10 Gbit/

s)



s: slots 4-8 and 11-15 (10 Gbit/s)



Not supported



Not supported

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10GBASE-

LW/LR

LC





65




InterfaceType

Connector

N3EAS2 Valid slots when the cross-



s); slots 7-8 and 11-12 (20

Gbit/s)




s)



Not supported


Not supported

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10GBASE-

LW/LR

LC

N1EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slots 5-8 and 11-14

(2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25

Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC

N2EGT2 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC





66




InterfaceType

Connector

s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

1000BASE-

TX

RJ-45

N1EFT8,

N2EFT8

(interfaces

available on

the front

panel)

Slots 1-6 and 13-16 (622 Mbit/

s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10/100BASE-

TX

RJ-45

N1EFT8,

N2EFT8

(with the

interface

board)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s)



slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/s), orslot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N1EFT8A,

N2EFT8A

Slots 1-8 and 11-16 (622 Mbit/

s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10/100BASE-

TX

RJ-45





67




InterfaceType

Connector

N2EGS2 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25

Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and

11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25

Gbit/s), and slots 5-8 and

11-14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-4 and 15-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), and slots 5-8 and 11-14 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC



s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC

1000BASE-T RJ-45





68




InterfaceType

Connector

N1EFS4 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (622

Mbit/s)



s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (622

Mbit/s)



slots 1-8 and 11-17 (622 Mbit/

s)


slots 1-8 and 11-16 (622 Mbit/

s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10/100BASE-

TX

RJ-45

N2EFS4,

N3EFS4



s: slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25

Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-8 and 11-16 (1.25



slots 1-8 and 11-17 (1.25 Gbit/

s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (1.25

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

10/100BASE-

TX

RJ-45

N1EFS0 Slots 2-5 and 13-16 (622 Mbit/

s)

The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -





69




InterfaceType

Connector

N1EFP0 Slots 2-5 and 13-16 (155 Mbit/

s)

The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N1EFS0A



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slots 5, 13, and 14

(2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-


slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernetelectrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N2EFS0,

N4EFS0



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s)



slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/


The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8A is

used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -





70




InterfaceType

Connector

N5EFS0 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25

Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 13-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s)



slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/


The

8x10/100Mbit/s

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8A or

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8A or

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N1EMS4

(with the

interface

board)



s: slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25Gbit/s), or slots 5, 13, and 14

(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/


The 8-port

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N1EMS4

(interfaces

available on

the front

panel)



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slots 5, 6, 13, and

14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC





71




InterfaceType

Connector



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/

s)

1000BASE-

TX

RJ-45

N1EMS2

(with the

interface

board)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



s: slots 2-5 and 13-16 (2.5



slots 2-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 2-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/


The 8-port

Ethernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N1EMS2

(interfacesavailable on

the front

panel)


connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-6 and 13-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-6 and 13-16 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on thefront panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX

LC





72




InterfaceType

Connector



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/

s)

1000BASE-

TX

RJ-45



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slots 5, 8, 11, and14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC

1000BASE-

TX

RJ-45





73




InterfaceType

Connector



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25

Gbit/s), or slots 5, 8, 11, and14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-3 and 16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 4-8, 11-15 (2.5

Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


14 (2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC

1000BASE-TX

RJ-45





74




InterfaceType

Connector

N1MST4 Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



s: slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-4, 15, and 16 (1.25


(2.5 Gbit/s)



slots 1-5 and 14-16 (1.25 Gbit/

s), or slots 6-8 and 11-13 (2.5

Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

X3.296/

(DVB-ASI)

EN50083-9,

200-M5-SN-I,

200-SM-LC-I

LC

NOTEThe N1EFS0A, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 can be used with the N1ETS8 and N1TSB8 to

realize the TPS protection.

Table 3-20 Interface boards corresponding to the EoS/EoP boards and their valid slots

Board Valid Slot Interface Type Connector

N1EFF8,

N1EFF8A

Slots 19-26 and 29-36 100BASE-FX LC

N1ETF8,

N1ETF8A

Slots 19-26 and 29-36 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

N1ETS8 Slots 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 29,

31, 33, 34, and 35

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

3.5.6 ATM Boards

The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM boards.

Table 3-21 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards on the OptiX OSN

equipment.





75



Table 3-21 Valid slots and interfaces of the ATM boards


InterfaceType

Connector

N1ADL4 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200

Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17

(1.25 Gbit/s)


connect capacity is 120


(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-



(1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfacesavailable on the

front panel

S-4.1, L-4.1,L-4.2,

Ve-4.2

LC

N1ADQ1 Valid slots when the cross-



(1.25 Gbit/s)



Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-16(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

Ie-1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2

LC





76




InterfaceType

Connector

N1IDL4,

N1IDL4A




(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)

Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40


(1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 6-8

and 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2,

Ve-4.2

LC

N1IDQ1,

N1IDQ1A




(1.25 Gbit/s)



Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-16(1.25 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s)





and 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

Ie-1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2

LC

3.5.7 RPR Boards

The OptiX OSN equipment supports RPR boards.

Table 3-22 provides the valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards on the OptiX OSN

equipment.

Table 3-23 provides the mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots on

the OptiX OSN equipment.





77



Table 3-22 Valid slots and interfaces of the RPR boards


InterfaceType

Connector

N2EMR0(with the

interface

board)


Gbit/s: slots 2-4, 15, and

16 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 5,

13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 13

(2.5 Gbit/s)

The 8-portEthernet

electrical

interface board

N1ETF8 is used.

- -

The 8-port

Ethernet optical

interface board

N1EFF8 is used.

- -

N2EMR0

(interfaces


panel)



Gbit/s: slots 1-4, 15, and16 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 5,

6, 13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





6, 13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





6, 13, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)




(1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 6

and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX

LC





78




InterfaceType

Connector

N2EGR2 Valid slots when the cross-




8, 11, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





8, 11, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





8, 11, and 14 (2.5 Gbit/s)





and 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Interfaces

available on the

front panel

1000BASE-

SX/LX/ZX/

VX

LC

Table 3-23 Mapping interface boards of the RPR boards and their valid slots

Board Valid Slot Interface Type Connector

N1EFF8 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 100BASE-FX LC

N1ETF8 Slots 19-26 and 29-36 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45

3.5.8 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.

Table 3-24 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500.





79



Table 3-24 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slots Interfacing Mode Connector

N1LWX Valid slots when the cross-connect

capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8,11-17 (slots in the extended

subrack: slots 51-55, 63-66)

Valid slots when the cross-connect

capacity is 120 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and

11-17


capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1-8,

11-17 (slots in the extended



capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and11-16

Interfaces available on

the front panel

LC

N1FIB Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-16







11-16


the front panel

LSH/LC

N1MR2A Valid slots when the cross-connect



subrack: slots 51-58, and 61-67)


capacity is 120 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and11-17







11-16


the front panel

LC





80




N1MR2C Valid slots when the cross-connect





capacity is 120 Gbit/s: slots 19-26

and 29-36






capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19-26

and 29-36


the front panel

LC

TN11MR2 Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-16







11-17


the front panel

LC

TN11MR4 Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-16Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-17


the front panel

LC





81




TN11CMR2 Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-16







11-17


the front panel

LC

TN11CMR4 Valid slots when the cross-connect






11-16







11-17


the front panel

LC

3.5.9 Microwave Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Microwave boards.

Table 3-25 lists the WDM boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.





82



Table 3-25 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slot Interfacing Mode Connector

N1IFSD1 Valid slots when the cross-

connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1-8 and 11-17



slots 1-8 and 11-17



slots 1-8 and 11-16

Interfaces available on the

front panel

IF

N1RPWR Valid slots when the cross-


s: slots 1-8 and 11-17



slots 1-8 and 11-17



slots 1-8 and 11-16

- Power supply

interface

3.5.10 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 su pports several optical amplifier boards.

Table 3-26 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface nfor the

OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-26 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX

OSN 3500


N1BA2 Valid slots when the cross-connect


11-17 (slots in the extended subrack:slots 51-58, 61-67)



11-17


capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1-8, 11-17

(slots in the extended subrack: slots

51-58, and 61-67)



11-16


the front panel

LC





83




N1BPA,

N2BPA



11-17 (slots in the extended subrack:

slots 51-58, 61-67)



11-17




51-58, 61-67)



11-16


the front panel

LC

N1DCU,

N2DCU



11-17 (slots in the extended subrack:

slots 51-58, 61-67)



11-17




51-58, 61-67)



11-16


the front panel

LC

N1COA,

61COA

Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on

the front panel

SC/PC

62COA Slots 101 and 102 Interfaces available on

the front panel

LSH/SC

ROP Slot 103 Interfaces available on

the front panel

LC

N1RPC01 Slot 104 and 106 Interfaces available on

the front panel

LSH/APC,

LC/PC

N1RPC02 Slot 105 and 107 Interfaces available on

the front panel

LSH/APC,

LC/PC





84




TN11OBU1

,

TN12OBU1



11-17



11-16





11-17


the front panel

LC

NOTEThe slots of the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP that are displayed on the NMS are logical slots rather

than physical slots.

The logical board of the TN12OBU1 board is TN11OBU1.

3.5.11 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.

Table 3-27 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards

and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-27 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards and

auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Valid Slots Connector

N1AUX Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 200

Gbit/s: slot 37 (slots in the extended subrack: slots

87)

Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 120

Gbit/s: slot 37


Gbit/s: slot 37 (slots in the extended subrack: slots87)


Gbit/s: slot 37

SMB, RJ-45





85



Board Valid Slots Connector

N1PIU,

N1PIUA


Gbit/s: slots 27-28 (slots in the extended subrack:

slots 77-78)


Gbit/s: slots 27 and 28



slots 77-78)



3V3 terminal, Four-

phase socket

N1PIUB Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200


slots 77-78)





slots 77-78)



Dual-OT terminal,

Four-phase socket

N1FAN Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200


slots 88-90)


Gbit/s: slots 38-40



slots 88-90)



-

The OptiX OSN 3500 uses a UPM system to support the access of 110 V/220 V power. TheUPM system is used to convert 110 V/220 V DC power into -48 V/-60 V AC power, so as to

supply power to the equipment.

NOTE

The OptiX OSN 3500 allows access of the UPM system and does not support management of the UPM

system.





86



4 Software Architecture

About This Chapter

4.1 Overview

The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works

with other modules.

4.2 Communication Protocols

Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and

Q.812.

4.3 Board Software

The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of

the board.

4.4 NE Software

The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition,

the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,

so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.

4.5 Network Management System

The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and

maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.

4.6 ASON Software

According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)

includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.


Product Description 4 Software Architecture



87



4.1 OverviewThe software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works

with other modules.

The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and

NM system.

The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchical

structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functions

and provides service for the upper layer.

The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1.

In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "Board

Software".

Figure 4-1 Software architecture with the ASON feature

High LevelCommunication Module

Communication Module

Equipment Management

Module

NE software

Network Management

System

Board Software

Database

Management

Module

Network side ModuleReal-time

multi-task

operating

system

4.2 Communication ProtocolsComplete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and

Q.812.

Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE)

equipment through local communication network (LCN).

At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.





88



According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on the

basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.

In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line internet

protocol (SLIP).

4.3 Board Software

The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation of

the board.

It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NE

software through performance events and alarm.

The specific functions include:

l Alarm management

l Performance management

l Configuration management

l Communication management

It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements ITU-T

compliant specific functions of the NE.

4.4 NE Software

The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In addition,

the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.

According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom management

network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and OS function at

network unit layer.

Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE and other

equipment (including NM and other NEs).

l Real-time multi-task operating system

The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public resources

and support application programs.

It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application program

execution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.

l Communication module

The communication module is the interface module between NE software and board

software.

According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software and the

board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the equipment.

Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from the NE

software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performance events

of the board are reported to the NE software.

l Network Side (NS) Module





89



The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management

module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer)

and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.

Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:

– Qx interface module

– Command line interface module

– Security management module

l Equipment management module

The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE management.

It includes administrator and agent.

Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.

Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implement

the operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of status

of the managed object.l High-level communication module

The high-level communication module exchanges management information among NEs

and between the NM system and the NE.

It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and ECC

communication module.

l Database management module

The database management module is a part of the NE software.

It includes two independent parts: data and program.

The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm database, performance database and equipment database.

The program manages and accesses the data in the database.

4.5 Network Management System

The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, and

maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.

In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standard

management information model as well as object-oriented management technology.

It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitor

and manage the network equipment.

The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the transmission

network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipment.

The management functions of the NM software include:

l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, and

counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis.

l Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and prints

performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resets performance register.





90



l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,

subnets and time.

l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE login

management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) access

control of the equipment.l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown

(ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help the

maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.

l Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path; determines the

connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the current alarm; analyzes the

faulty node and locates the faulty board.

l Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the VC-4 channel

that maps the MS protection channel.

4.6 ASON SoftwareAccording to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)

includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.

The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The

transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON

software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest

path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering)

protocols.

Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the

link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection

management module.

Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture

Cross-connection

management

module

N E

software

Signaling module

Routing module

NMS

AOSN sof tw are

LMP link management

module





91



Link Management Module

By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:

l Create and maintain control channels.

l Verify member links and TE links.

Signaling Module

By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:

l Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.

l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.

Routing Module

By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:l Collect and flood the TE link information.

l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.

l Compute service trails and control the routing.

Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:

l Create and delete cross-connections.

l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.





92



5 Data Features

About This Chapter

The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN/Video features

and DDN features.

5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the

OptiX OSN 3500.

5.2 RPR Features

The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover

Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.

5.3 ATM Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the ATM over SDH. By using the ATM service processing board,

the equipment can encapsulate the voice, data, and video services into the ATM cells of a fixed

length at the transmit end, transmit the cells on the SDH virtual path at a high rate, and

decapsulate the cells to recover the services at the receive end. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports

the ATM ser vices that use the bandwidth exclusively, the ATM services that share the

bandwidth, and the IMA services.

5.4 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN

3500.

5.5 SAN/Video Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,

N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.


Product Description 5 Data Features



93



5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of theOptiX OSN 3500.

5.1.1 Functions of Transparent Transmission Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides various types of Ethernet transparent transmission boards to

realize different Ethernet services.

Table 5-1 provides the functions and features of the EFT8.

Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EFT8

FunctionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Transparently transmits 8xFE or 16xFE services.

Interfa

ce

types

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is used with the

ETF8.

l Supports 100BASE-FX/100BASE-TX signals when the EFT8 is used with the

EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce board

l Receives/Transmits 8 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface

independently.

l Receives/Transmits 16 Ethernet signals through the electrical interface when the

EFT8 is used with the ETF8.

l Receives/Transmits 8 Ethernet optical signals and 8 Ethernet electrical signals

when the EFT8 is used with the EFF8.

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

100M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports

Auto-negotiation mode Not supported

Non-autonegotiation mode Supported

Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported





94



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

thresholds

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Not supported

EPL

servic

e

Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames

IEEE 802.3 Supported

Ethernet II Supported

IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported

Maximu

m frame

length

l Ports 1-4 and 9-12 on the N1EFT8 support the frame with a length

ranging from 64 bytes to 1535 bytes, whereas ports 5-8 and 13-16

support the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes.

The N1EFT8 supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than

9600 bytes.

l The N2EFT8 supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes

to 9600 bytes.

MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes

to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets

that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound

bandwidt

h

24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies

Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 3)

granularities.





95



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Supported

LAPS Supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Does not support the MPLS.

VLAN

technolo

gy

Supports VLAN transparent transmission.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

The maximum uplink bandwidth is 1.25 Gbit/s. The EFT8 can adapt to

the bandwidth of the slot.

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions

Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 16

Configuration principles are as follows:

l A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a

maximum of 63 VC-12s.

l A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path at

one time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC-3

paths at the same time.

l Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.

l VCTRUNK 1-VCTRUNK 8 can be bound with VC-3s 1-12 or

VC-12s 1-63.

l VCTRUNK 9-VCTRUNK 16 can be bound with VC-3s 13-24 or

VC-12s 64-126.

l A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1-63 and

VC-3s numbered 10-12 at the same time. In addition, a VCTRUNK

cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 64-126 and VC-3snumbered 22-24 at the same time.

l VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12

paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

LPT l The N1EFT8 supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode.

lThe N2EFT8 supports the P2P LPT in GFP/Ethernet bearer mode.





96



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

LAG Not supported

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

efeatur

es

ETH-

OAM

(N1EFT8) Does not support the ETH-OAM function.

The N2EFT8 supports continuity check (CC) for the multicast service,

loopback (LB) test for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loopdetection (LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance

detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE 802.1ag and

IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

Response

to ping

Not supported

Port

mirroring

Does not support the port mirroring function.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y

PHY layer at Ethernet ports Inloops

MAC layer at Ethernet ports Inloops

VC-4 level Not supported

VC-3 level Inloops and outloops


Ethernet

performa

ncemonitori

ng

(RMON)

Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported





97



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

management and maintenance of the equipment.

QoS Does not support the QoS function.

Traffi

c

contro

l

Supports the FE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Table 5-2 provides the functions and features of the EFT8A.

Table 5-2 Functions and features of the EFT8A

FunctionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Transparently transmits 8xFE services.

Interfa

ce

types

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals.

l The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functi

ons

when being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board

Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.

Interfa

ce

charac

Working

modes

100M full-duplex





98



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

teristic

s

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Not supported

EPL

servic

e


Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length

l Supports the setting of the method used for processing frames with

less than 64 bytes or error frames.

l The first four ports on the N1EFT8A support the frame with a length

ranging from 64 bytes to 1535 bytes and the last four ports support

the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. The

N1EFT8A supports the Jumbo frame with a length not more than

9600 bytes.

l The N2EFT8A supports the frame with a length ranging from 64

bytes to 9600 bytes.





99



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description



that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound

bandwidt

h

12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies


granularities.

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Supported

LAPS Supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Does not support the MPLS.

VLAN

technolo

gy

Supports VLAN transparent transmission.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

622 Mbit/s

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions



l A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of three VC-3s or a


lA VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-12 path or VC-3 path atone time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-12 and VC-3

paths at the same time.

l Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at different levels.

l A VCTRUNK cannot be bound with VC-12s numbered 1–63 and

VC-3s numbered 10–12 at the same time.

l VC-4 numbered 4 supports the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths.

The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.

Protec

tion

TPS Not supported





100



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

schem

es



LPT l The N1EFT8A supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode.

l The N2EFT8A supports the P2P LPT in GFP/Ethernet bearer mode.

LAG Not supported

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

Not supported by the N1EFT8A

The N2EFT8A supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the

unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link

performance monitoring. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE

802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame


Response

to ping

Not supported

Port

mirroring

Does not support the port mirroring function.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y




VC-3 level Inloops and outloops


Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


Warm

resets

Supported





101



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events



QoS Does not support the QoS function.

Traffic

contro

l

Supports the FE interface-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE802.3x.

Table 5-3 provides the functions and features of the EGT2.

Table 5-3 Functions and features of the EGT2

Funct

ionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Transparently transmits 2xGE services.

Interfa

ce

types

l Supports the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet optical interfaces. The optical

interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z.

The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping.

When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distanceis 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission

distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for

the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.

l The N2EGT2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface.

The electrical interface supports the 1000M full-duplex working mode. The

N2EGT2 uses the SFP electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The

maximum transmission distance is 100 m.





102



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board

Provides interfaces on the front panel.

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

The N1EGT2 supports 100M full-duplex.

The N2EGT2 supports 1000M full-duplex.

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Supports hot swapping of SFP optical modules.

EPL

servic

e


Servic

e

specifi

Formats

of

Ethernet







103



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

cation

s

data

frames


Maximu

m frame

length

l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600

bytes.

l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

MTU l The N1EGT2 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges

from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the

length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is restricted by

the pre-set MTU.

l The N2EGT2 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges


length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-

set MTU.

Bound

bandwidt

h

16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies

Supports VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24 (N1EGT2); X ≤ 48

(N2EGT2)), and VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8 (N1EGT2); X ≤ 16 (N2EGT2))

granularities.

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Supported

LAPS Supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Not supported

VLAN

technolo

gy

Supports the VLAN transparent transmission.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGT2 can adapt to






104



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions



l N1EGT2: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight

VC-4s or a maximum of 24 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound

with VC-4s numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48.

l N2EGT2: A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 16 VC-4s

or a maximum of 48 VC-3s. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-4s

numbered 1-16 or VC-3s numbered 1-48.

l The virtual concatenation modes of the two VCTRUNKs of the

board should be the same. That is, the two VCTRUNKs should be

of the VC-4 virtual concatenation or of the VC-3 virtual

concatenation.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported



LPT Supports the P2P LPT in GFP bearer mode.

LAG Not supported

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l The N1EGT2 does not support the ETH-OAM function.

l The N2EGT2 supports CC, LB test, and LT test. The ETH-OAM

function complies with IEEE 802.1ag.

Testframe Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

Response

to ping

Not supported

Port

mirroring

Not supported

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y








105



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description



Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


Warmresets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events



QoS Not supported

Traffi

c

contro

l

Supports the GE port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

5.1.2 Functions of Switching Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides various types of Ethernet switching boards to realize different

Ethernet services.

Table 5-4 provides the functions and features of the EFS0.

Table 5-4 Functions and features of the EFS0

Function andFeature

Description

Basic functions Processes 8xFE services.





106



Function andFeature

Description

Interface types l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0 is used

with the ETF8.

l Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0 is used with the

EFF8. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

l The N5EFS0 supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when it is

used with the ETF8A.

l The N5EFS0 supports 100BASE-FX signals when it is used with

the EFF8A. The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functions when

being used with an

interface board

l Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals through the electrical interface

when the EFS0 is used with the ETF8.

l Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals through the optical interface when

the EFS0 is used with the EFF8.l Provides the TPS protection for the 8xFE signals through the

electrical interface when the EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8.

l The N5EFS0 can receive/transmit 8xFE signals through the

electrical interface when it is used with the ETF8A.

l The N5EFS0 can receive/transmit 8xFE signals through the optical

interface when it is used with the EFF8A.

Interface

characteristics

Workin

g

modes

100M full-duplex

Trafficcontrol

at ports

Auto-negotiation mode Supported


Query/

Setting

of port

status

Supported

Query

of

interfac

e types

Supported

RMON

measur

ement

Supported

Setting

of

optical

power

thresho

lds

Not supported





107



Function andFeature

Description

Hot

optical

module

swappi

ng


Service categories EPL

service


EVPL

service

Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the

frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.

EPLA

N

service

l Supports the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) converging

service that is based on Layer 2.

l Supports the Layer 2 forwarding function.

l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.

l Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and

also the static MAC address table that can contain 2K

records. The sum of the number of records in the blacklist

and the number of addresses in the static MAC address

table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist function of the

N5EFS0 supports verification of destination MAC

addresses only.

l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address.

The capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging

time of the MAC address can be set and queried.

l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route.

l The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 does not support the query of the

dynamic MAC address. The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports

the query of the dynamic MAC address.

l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The

maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum

number of logical ports for each VB is 30.

l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses

based on VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE802.1d MAC bridge.

Service

specifications

Format

s of

Etherne

t data

frames



IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported

Maxim

um

frame

length

l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes

to 9600 bytes.

l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600

bytes.





108



Function andFeature

Description

MTU l The N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 supports the setting of

the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600

bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the

packets that exit the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set

MTU.

l The N5EFS0 supports the setting of the packet length,

which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the

setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter

the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound

bandwi

dth

N1EFS0: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0: 24xVC-3, or 126xVC-12 +

18xVC-3

Mappin

g

granula

rities

Supports VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), and VC-3-Xv

(X ≤ 12) granularities.

Encaps

ulation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technology

Supports the MPLS.

VLAN

technol

ogy

Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with

IEEE 802.1q/p.

Maxim

um

uplink

bandwi

dth

l The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS0 is 622

Mbit/s.

l The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N2EFS0/

N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

l The EFS0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.





109



Function andFeature

Description

VCTR

UNK

specific

ations

The number of supported VCTRUNKs is as follows:

l The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS0is 12.

l The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N2EFS0/

N4EFS0/N5EFS0 is 24.


l In the case of the N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0,

VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 12 can be bound with VC-4s

numbered 1–4 only, and VCTRUNK 13–VCTRUNK 24

can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5–8 only.

l VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3

and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the bindingof VC-3 paths only.

l A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at

the same time.

Protection schemes TPS Not supported by the N1EFS0 but supported by the N2EFS0/

N4EFS0/N5EFS0.

BPS Not supported

PPS Not supported

DLAG Not supported

LAG The N1EFS0 does not support link aggregation, but the

N2EFS0/N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports manual link

aggregation and the load sharing mode.

LCAS Not supported by the N1EFS0/N2EFS0

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and

protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.

This protection scheme is supported by the N4EFS0/

N5EFS0.

LPT The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 supports the P2P LPT. The N4EFS0/

N5EFS0 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/

RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and

RSTP that comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported

Clock

synchronization

Synchr

onous

Etherne

t

Not supported





110



Function andFeature

Description

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maintenance

features

ETH-

OAM

l The N1EFS0 and N2EFS0 do not support the ETH-OAM

function.

l The N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 support continuity check (CC)

for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test for the

unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD),

auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance

detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with IEEE

802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

l The N1EFS0/N2EFS0 supports test frames in Ethernet

bearer mode.

l The N4EFS0/N5EFS0 supports test frames in Ethernet/

GFP bearer mode.

Respon

se to

ping

Supports the setting and query of the board IP address

(supported by the N5EFS0 only).

Port

mirrori

ng

The N1EFS0/N2EFS0/N4EFS0 does not supports port

mirroring. The N5EFS0 supports ingress mirroring.

Loopba

ck capabili

ty




VC-3 level The N1EFS0/N2EFS0/

N4EFS0 supports inloops

and outloops. The N5EFS0

does not support inloops or

outloops.


Ethernet

perfor

mance

monitor

ing

(RMO

N)

Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.The N5EFS0 supports VCG-based Ethernet performance

monitoring.





111



Function andFeature

Description

Warm

resets

N1EFS0/N2EFS0 boards do not support warm resets;

N4EFS0/N5EFS0 boards support warm resets, but they do

not support warm resets if they substitute for N1EFS0/

N2EFS0 boards using the board version replacement

function.

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

perfor

mance

events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which

facilitates the management and maintenance of the

equipment.

QoS l Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.

l The N1EFS0 supports the service classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.

l The N2EFS0, N4EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the flow classification

based on PORT, PORT++VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN

PRI.

IGMP snooping Supports the IGMP snooping function.

Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE

802.3x.

Traffic monitoring The N5EFS0 supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic

monitoring.

Table 5-5 provides the functions and features of the EFS0A.

Table 5-5 Functions and features of the EFS0A

Function

andFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Processes 16xFE services.

Interfa

ce

types

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EFS0A is used with the

ETF8.

l Supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EFS0A is used with the EFF8. The

optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.





112



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board

l Receives/Transmits 16xFE signals through the electrical interface when the

EFS0A is used with the ETF8.

l Receives/Transmits 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EFS0A

is used with the EFF8.

l Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals through the electrical interface and 8xFE

signals through the optical interface when the EFS0A is used with the ETF8 and

EFF8.

l Provides the TPS protection for the 16xFE signals through the electrical interface

when the EFS0A is used with the ETS8 and TSB8.

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

100M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports


Non-autonegotiation mode Not supported

Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Not supported

Servic

e

catego

ries

EPL

service


EVPL

service

Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame

encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.





113



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

EPLAN

service

l Supports the P2MP converging service that is based on Layer 2.



l Supports the blacklist that can contain 2K records and also the static

MAC address table that can contain 2K records. The sum of the

number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses in

the static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist

function supports verification of destination MAC addresses only.

l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity

of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MACaddress can be set and queried.


l The N1EFS0, N2EFS0, and N5EFS0 support the query of the

dynamic MAC address.

l Support the query of the dynamic MAC address.

l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum

number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number of logical

ports for each VB is 48.

l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on

VB+VLAN or VB+LP.l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d

MAC bridge.

EVPLA

N service

l Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges.

l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN services.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q

virtual bridge.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad

virtual bridge.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.






114



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description



that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

Bound

bandwidt

h

48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies


granularities.

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Supports the MPLS.

VLAN

technolo

gy

Supports 4k VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE

802.1q/p.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.

The EFS0A can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions



l VC-4s numbered 4, 8, 12, and 16 support the binding of VC-3 and

VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths

only.

l A VC-4 cannot be bound with VC-3 and VC-12 paths at the same

time.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Supported

BPS Not supported

PPS Not supported

DLAG Not supported

LAG Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode.





115



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description



LPT Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/

RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that

comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

Supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the unicast service,

LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance

detection.

Test

frame

Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.

Response

to ping

Supports the setting and query of the board IP address.

Port

mirroring

Supports ingress mirroring.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y






Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)

Supports port-based and VCG-based Ethernet performance monitoring.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported





116



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events




l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supported

Traffi

c

contro

l

Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Table 5-6 provides the functions and features of the EFS4.

Table 5-6 Functions and features of the EFS4

FunctionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Processes 4xFE services.

Interface

types

Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals. The optical interfaces comply withIEEE 802.3u.





117



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board

Receives/Transmits 4xFE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

100M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Not supported

Servic

e

catego

ries

EPL

service


EVPL

service







118



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

EPLAN

service








function of the N3EFS4 supports verification of destination MAC

addresses only.

l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacityof the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC

address can be set and queried.


l The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the query of the dynamic MAC

address.

l The N1EFS4 does not support the query of the dynamic MAC

address.




l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on

VB+VLAN or VB+LP.

l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d

MAC bridge.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximum frame

length

Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytesand supports the jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.

MTU l The N1EFS4/N2EFS4 supports the setting of the packet length,

which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting

becomes valid, the length of the packets that exit the IP ports is

restricted by the pre-set MTU.

l The N3EFS4 supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges


length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-

set MTU.





119



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Bound

bandwidt

h

l N1EFS4: 12xVC-3, or 63xVC-12 + 9xVC-3

l N2EFS4/N3EFS4: 24xVC-3 or 126xVC-12 + 18xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies


granularities.

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Supports the MPLS.

VLAN

technolo

gy


802.1q/p.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidth

l The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N1EFS4 is 622 Mbit/s.

l The maximum uplink bandwidth of the N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 is 1.25

Gbit/s.

l The EFS4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions

l The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EFS4 is 12.

l The number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N2EFS4 and N3EFS4

is 24.


l VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 12 of the N1EFS4 and N2EFS4 can be

bound with VC-4s numbered 1–4 only. VCTRUNK 13–VCTRUNK

24 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5–8 only.

l VC-4s numbered 4 and 8 support the binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths only.


time.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

BPS Not supported

PPS Not supported

DLAG Not supported





120



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

LCAS Not supported by the N1EFS4

Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. This protection scheme

is supported by the N2EFS4/N3EFS4.

LPT l The N1EFS4 supports the P2P LPT.

l The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/

RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP that

comply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported

LAG The N1EFS4 does not support this protection scheme. The N2EFS4/

N3EFS4 supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode.

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Does not support the high-precision time.

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l The N1EFS4 does not support the ETH-OAM function.

l The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support CC for the multicast service, LB

test for the unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault

diagnosis, and link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function

complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

l The N1EFS4 supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.

l The N2EFS4/N3EFS4 supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer

mode.

Response

to ping

Supports the setting and query of the board IP address (supported by

the N3EFS4 only).

Port

mirroring

The N3EFS4 supports ingress mirroring.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y

PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops

MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops


VC-3 level The N1EFS4/N2EFS4 supports

inloops and outloops.






121



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


The N3EFS4 supports VCG-based Ethernet performance monitoring.

Warm

resets

N1EFS4 boards do not support warm resets; N2EFS4/N3EFS4 boards

support warm resets, but they do not support warm resets if they

substitute for N1EFS4 boards using the board version replacement

function.

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events




l The N1EFS4 supports the service classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN

ID, or PORT+VLAN PRI.

l The N2EFS4 and N3EFS4 support the flow classification based on PORT, PORT

++VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supports the IGMP snooping function.

Traffi

c

contro

l


Traffi

c

monit

oring

The N3EFS4 supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

Table 5-7 provides the functions and features of the EGS2.





122



Table 5-7 Functions and features of the EGS2

Functionand

Feature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Processes 2xGE services.

Interfa

ce

types




When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission distance

is 550 m. When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum transmission

distance is 10 km. The optical modules that can meet different requirements for the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be used.

l The N3EGS2 also supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface.

The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated

rate can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The N3EGS2 uses the SFP

electrical interface and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission

distance is 100 m.

Functi

ons

when

being

usedwith

an

interfa

ce

board


Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

1000M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported





123



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping


Service

catego

ries

EPLservice


EVPL

service



EPLAN

service






number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses inthe static MAC address table must not exceed 2K. The blacklist

function of the N3EGS2 supports verification of destination MAC

addresses only.


of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the MAC






l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1dMAC bridge.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.






124



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description




Bound

bandwidt

h

48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12 + 36xVC-3

Mapping

granularit

ies

VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24).

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Supported

VLAN

technolo

gy


802.1q/p.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

The maximum uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s. The EGS2 can adapt to






125



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions



l In the case of the N2EGS2, VCTRUNK 1–VCTRUNK 12 can be

bound with VC-4s numbered 1–4 only, VCTRUNK13–VCTRUNK

24 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 5–8 only, VCTRUNK 25–

VCTRUNK 36 can be bound with VC-4s numbered 9–12 only, and

VCTRUNK 37–VCTRUNK 48 can be bound with VC-4s numbered

13–16 only.

l In the case of the N3EGS2, there is no requirement regarding

VCTRUNK binding. One VCTRUNK can be bound with up to 24VC-3s.



only.


time.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

BPS Not supported by the N2EGS2 but supported by the N3EGS2

PPS Not supported

DLAG Not supported

LAG Supports manual link aggregation and the load sharing mode.



LPT l The N2EGS2 supports the P2P LPT.

l The N3EGS2 supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.

STP/RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP thatcomply with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported





126



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l The N2EGS2 does not support the ETH-OAM function.

l The N3EGS2 supports CC for the multicast service, LB test for the

unicast service, LT test, LD, auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and

link performance detection. The ETH-OAM function complies with

IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

The N2EGS2 supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode, whereas the

N3EGS2 supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.

Response

to ping


the N3EGS2 only).

Port

mirroring

The N3EGS2 supports ingress mirroring.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y




VC-3 level The N2EGS2 supports inloops

and outloops. The N3EGS2 does

not support inloops or outloops.


Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


Warm

resets

N2EGS2 boards do not support warm resets; N3EGS2 boards support

warm resets, but they do not support warm resets if they substitute for

N2EGS2 boards using the board version replacement function.

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events







127



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description


l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

l The N3EGS2 supports the traffic shaping function.

l The N3EGS2 supports the flow classification based on PORT+DSCP or PORT

+ToS.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supports the IGMP snooping function. In addition, the N3EGS2 supports the IGMP

snooping fast-leave function, HUB/SPOKE, unknown multicast packet discarding

function, and static multicast function.

NOTEThe N3EGS2 supports the IGMP snooping fast-leave function when it substitutes for the

N2EGS2 through the board version replacement function.

Traffi

c

contro

l


Traffi

c

monit

oring

The N3EGS2 supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

Table 5-8 provides the functions and features of the EMS2.

Table 5-8 Functions and features of the EMS2

FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Receives/Transmits and processes 2xGE and 16xFE services.





128



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Interfa

ce

types








l Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical

interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10

Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s. The board uses the SFP electrical interface

and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS2 is used with the

ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EMS2 is used with the EFF8.

l The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

aninterfa

ce

board


EMS2 is used with the ETF8.

l Receives/Transmits 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS2



signals through the optical interface when the EMS2 is used with the ETF8 and

EFF8.

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

100M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of port

status

Supported

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported





129



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping


Service

catego

ries

EPLservice

Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.

EVPL

service

l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN.

– Supports a maximum of 2048 services that are accessed through

IP ports.

– Supports a maximum of 2048 services that are accessed through

VCTRUNKs.

– Supports a maximum of 4096 links.

l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services.

lSupports PORT-based service forwarding.

EPLAN

service













number of supported VBs is 16.


MAC bridge.





130



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

EVPLA

N service

l Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges.


l Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services.


virtual bridge and the IEEE 802.1ad virtual bridge.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames



IEEE 802.1q/p Supported

Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.


MTU l Supports EVPLAN virtual bridges.


l Supports the configuration of up to 4096 VLAN services.


virtual bridge and the IEEE 802.1ad virtual bridge.

Bound

bandwidt

h

8xVC-4, 24xVC-3 or 63xVC-12

Mapping

granularit

ies

VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), VC-4-Xv (X

≤ 8).

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Not supported

VLAN

technolo

gy

l Supports VLAN and QinQ, and supports the addition, deletion, and

exchanging of VLAN tags. The function complies with IEEE

802.1q/p.

l Supports 4096 S-VLANs (0-4095) and 4096 C-VLANs (0-4095) in

the case of QinQ services.

l Supports 4095 VLANs (1-4095) in the case of EVPL services.





131



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

2.5 Gbit/s

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions





only.


time.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

BPS Not supported

PPS Not supported

DLAG Not supported

LAG Supports manual link aggregation and load sharing link aggregation.




STP/

RSTP

Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported

Clock

synchr

onization

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l Supports CC, LB test, LT test, and OAM Ping, which comply with

IEEE 802.1ag.

l Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopback, fault diagnosis,

link performance monitoring, and self-loop test, which comply with

IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

Supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.





132



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Response

to ping

Supports the setting and query of the board IP address.

Port

mirroring

Supports ingress mirroring.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y






Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)

Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and

VCTRUNKs.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events




l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT

+SVLAN, and PORT+VLAN+PRI.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supported

Traffi

c

contro

l






133



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Traffi

c

monit

oring

Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

Table 5-9 provides the functions and features of the EMS4.

Table 5-9 Functions and features of the EMS4

FunctionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE and 16xFE services

Interfa

cetypes


interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in compliance with IEEE 802.3z.The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot swapping.





l Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical

interface supports the auto-negotiation function. The negotiated rate can be 10

Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or. 1000 Mbit/s. The EMS4 uses the SFP electrical interface

and supports hot swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMS4 is used with the

ETF8 and supports 100BASE-FX signals when the EMS4 is used with the EFF8.l The optical interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board


EMS4 is used with the ETF8.

l Receives/Transmits 16xFE signals through the optical interface when the EMS4



signals through the optical interface when the EMS4 is used with the ETF8 and

EFF8.





134



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

1000M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping


Servic

e

catego

ries

EPL

service


EVPL

service


– Supports a maximum of 4000 services that are received/

transmitted through IP ports.


transmitted through VCTRUNKs.



l Supports PORT-based service forwarding.





135



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

EPLAN

service



l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static

MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist









MAC bridge.

EVPLA

N service




virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.

Servic

especifi

cation

s

Formats

of Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.





Bound

bandwidt

h

16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12

Mapping

granularit

ies

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 64), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and

VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8).

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Supported

LAPS Supported

GFP-F Supported





136



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

MPLS

technolo

gy

Not supported

VLAN

technolo

gy



802.1q/p.

l Supports 4096 S-VLANs (0–4095) and 4096 C-VLANs (0–4095)

in the case of QinQ services.

l Supports 4095 VLANs (1–4095) in the case of EVPL services.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

2.5 Gbit/s.

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions

64

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

BPS Supported

PPS Supported

DLAG Supported

LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.




STP/

RSTP


MSTP Supports the MSTP.

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported





137



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l Supports OAM_Ping, CC, and LB test, which comply with IEEE

802.1ag.



IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame


Response

to ping

Not supported

Port

mirroring

Not supported

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y


MAC layer at Ethernet ports Not supported




Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


VCTRUNKs.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates



l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, or PORT

+SVLAN.





138



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supports the IGMP snooping function and the IGMP snooping fast-leave function.

Traffi

c

contro

l


Table 5-10 provides the functions and features of the EGS4.

Table 5-10 Functions and features of the EGS4

FunctionandFeature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Receives/Transmits and processes 4xGE services.

Interfa

ce

types








l The N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 also support the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet

electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the auto-negotiation

function. The N1EGS4 supports the negotiated rate of 1000 Mbit/s and the N4EGS4 supports the negotiated rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s.

The N1EGS4 and N4EGS4 use the SFP electrical interface and support hot

swapping. The maximum transmission distance is 100 m.





139



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board


Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

1000M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported

Hot

optical

module

swapping


Servic

e

catego

ries

EPL

service






140



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

EVPL

service



transmitted through IP ports.


transmitted through VCTRUNKs.



l Supports PORT-based service forwarding.

EPLANservice




MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The blacklist






l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The EGS4

supports a maximum of two VBs.l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d

MAC bridge.

EVPLA

N service




virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.









141



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Bound

bandwidt

h

l N1EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 1008xVC-12

l N3EGS4/N4EGS4: 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 504xVC-12

Mapping

granularit

ies

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 64), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and

VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8).

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Supported

LAPS Supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Not supported

VLAN

technolo

gy



802.1q/p.

l Supports 4096 S-VLANs (0–4095) and 4096 C-VLANs (0–4095)

in the case of QinQ services.

lSupports 4095 VLANs (1–4095) in the case of EVPL services.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

2.5 Gbit/s

VCTRU

NK

specificat

ions

64


VC-4s numbered 1-4 and 9-12 of the N3EGS4/N4EGS4 support the

binding of VC-3 and VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding

of VC-3 paths only.

Protec

tion

schem

es

TPS Not supported

BPS Supported

PPS Supported

DLAG Supported







142



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description



LPT Supports the P2P LPT and the P2MP LPT.

STP/

RSTP


MSTP The N1EGS4 Supports the MSTP.

Data DNI

Protectio

n

Supported by the N4EGS4

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur es

ETH-

OAM

l The N1EGS4/N3EGS4 supports CC and LB test, which comply with

IEEE 802.1ag.

l The N4EGS4 supports CC, LB test, LT test, and OAM_Ping, which

comply with IEEE 802.1ag.



IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

N1EGS4/N3EGS4 supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

N4EGS4 supports test frames in Ethernet/GFP bearer mode.

Response

to ping


the N4EGS4 only).

Port

mirroring

The N4EGS4 supports ingress mirroring.

Loopbac

k

capabilit

y


MAC layer at Ethernet ports Not supported








143



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)


VCTRUNKs.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events



QoS l Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s. The N1EGS4 supports 512 rate

modes, and the N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 support 60 rate modes.

l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+VLAN

+PRI, or PORT+SVLAN.

l The N4EGS4 supports the setting of modes and weights for scheduling queues.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

Supports the IGMP snooping fast-leave function. In addition, the N4EGS4 supports

the unknown multicast packet discarding function.

Traffi

c

contro

l


Traffi

cmonit

oring

The N4EGS4 supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

Table 5-11 provides the functions and features of the EAS2.





144



Table 5-11 Functions and features of the EAS2

Functionand

Feature

Description

Basic

functi

ons

Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.

Interfa

ce

types

The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical

interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.

Functi

ons

when

being

used

with

an

interfa

ce

board


Interfa

ce

charac

teristic

s

Working

modes

10GE full-duplex

Trafficcontrol at

ports



Query/

Setting of

port

status

Supported

Query of

interface

types

Supported

RMON

measure

ment

Supported

Setting of

optical

power

threshold

s

Not supported





145



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Hot

optical

module

swapping

Supports hot swapping of XFP optical modules (N1EAS2).

Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules (N3EAS2).

Servic

e

catego

ries

EPL

service


EVPL

service


l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN.

lSupports QinQ-based EVPL services.

l Supports a maximum of 2048 links in the case of the N1EAS2;

supports a maximum of 4096 links in the case of the N3EAS2.

EPLAN

service




MAC address table that can contain 512 records.

l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address.

l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function.

EVPLA N service

lSupports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation.


l Supports the broadcast packet suppression function.

Servic

e

specifi

cation

s

Formats

of

Ethernet

data

frames




Maximu

m frame

length


bytes.





Bound

bandwidt

h

N1EAS2: 64xVC-4 or 192xVC-3

N3EAS2: 128xVC-4





146



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

Mapping

granularit

ies

N1EAS2: Supports the following adjacent concatenation granularities:

VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8), VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24), and VC-4-4c/8c.

N3EAS2: Supports the following adjacent concatenation granularities:

VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 64) and VC-4-4c/16c/64c.

Encapsul

ation

formats

HDLC Not supported

LAPS Not supported

GFP-F Supported

MPLS

technolo

gy

Not supported by the N1EAS2.

Tunnel-based label switching supported by the N3EAS2.

VLAN

technolo

gy

Supports a total number of 4095 VLANs, which comply with IEEE

802.1q/p.

Maximu

m uplink

bandwidt

h

N1EAS2: 10 Gbit/s

N3EAS2: 20 Gbit/s

The EAS2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

VCTRU NK

specificat

ions

The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N1EAS2 is24.


l A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or a


l A VCTRUNK can be bound with the VC-4 path or VC-3 path at one

time. A VCTRUNK should not be bound with VC-4 and VC-3 paths

at the same time. Different VCTRUNKs can be bound with paths at

different levels.

l Supports VC-4-4c adjacent concatenation and VC-3/VC-4 virtual

concatenation.The maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the N3EAS2 is

34.


l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4

paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of

eight VC-4 paths.

Protec

tion

TPS Not supported

BPS Not supported





147



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

schem

es

PPS Not supported

DLAG Supported






STP/

RSTP

Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply

with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Does not support the MSTP in the case of the N1EAS2; supports the

MSTP in the case of the N3EAS2

ERPS Does not support the ERPS in the case of the N1EAS2; supports the

ERPS in the case of the N3EAS2.

NOTEThe following bridges do not support ERPS:

l IEEE 802.1d bridge

l IEEE 802.1ad bridge in SVL/Disable Ingress Filtering mode

Clock

synchr

onizati

on

Synchron

ous

Ethernet

Not supported

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported

Maint

enanc

e

featur

es

ETH-

OAM

l Supports CC tests for multicast services, LB tests for unicast

services, LT tests, and specific alarms. These functions comply with

IEEE 802.1ag.

l Supports OAM auto-discovery and remote loopback functions.

These functions comply with IEEE 802.3ah.

Test

frame

Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes.

Response

to ping

Not supported

Port

mirroring

Supported

Loopbac

k







148



FunctionandFeatu

re

Description

capabilit

y




Ethernet

performa

nce

monitori

ng

(RMON)

l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.

l Supports the query of the rate of a port.

l The N3EAS2 detects whether the traffic volume at a port exceeds

the specified threshold and reports specific alarms.

Warm

resets

Supported

Cold

resets

Supported

Alarms

and

performa

nce

events

Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the


QoS l Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS labels, or MPLS label+EXP value.

l Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.

l Each port supports eight priority queues.

l Supports shaping based on ports or queues.

IGMP

snoopi

ng

l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of

1024 multicast groups.

l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol.

l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters.

l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.

Traffi

c

contro

l


Table 5-12 lists the functions and features of the EFP0 board.





149



Table 5-12 Functions and features of the EFP0 board

Functionand Feature

Description

Basicfunctions

Processes 8xFE services so that the FE services can be carried on the PDHnetwork directly.

Interface

types

l Supports the 10BASE-TX and 100BASE-TX interfaces with the ETF8.

l Supports the 100BASE-FX interface with the EFF8.

Functions

when being

used with an

interface

board

l Receives and transmits 8xFE services through electrical interfaces with

the ETF8.

l Receives and transmits 8xFE services through optical interfaces with the

EFF8.

Interface

characteristic

s

Working

modes

Auto-negotiation, 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M

half-duplex, 100M full-duplex

Traffic

control at

ports

Auto-negotiation

mode

Supported.

Non-

autonegotiation

mode

Supported.

Query/

Setting of

port status

Supported.

Query of

interface

types

Supported.

RMON

measureme

nt

Supported.

Setting of

optical

power

thresholds

Not supported.

Hot-

swapping

SFP optical

module

Supported.

Service

categories

EPL

service

Supports transparent transmission based on PORT.

EVPL

service


l Supports EVPL services based on QinQ. Supports the

service forwarding based on PORT.

l A maximum of 1024 LINK services are supported.





150



Functionand Feature

Description

EPLAN

service

l Supports Layer 2 convergence and point-to-multipoint

convergence.

l Supports the forwarding function of Layer 2 switching.

l Supports the client-side switching and PDH-side

switching.

l Supports a maximum of 512 blacklist entries and 512 static

MAC addresses.

l Supports the function of self-learning the source MAC

address. The MAC address table is 16k in size. The aging

time of the MAC address can be set and queried.

l Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.

lSupports the querying of dynamic MAC addresses.

l Supports the creation, deletion, and querying of the VB.

The maximum number of the VBs is 1. The maximum

number of logical ports for each VB is 24.

l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

l Supports the Hub-Spoken.

EVPLAN

service


l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4096 VLAN

services.

l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE

802.1q virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.

Service

specifications

Formats of

Ethernet

data frames

IEEE 802.3 Supported.

Ethernet II Supported.

IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported.

Maximum

frame

length

Supports a frame of 64 bytes to 2000 bytes. A jumbo frame

of more than 2000 bytes is not supported.

MTU Ranges from 64 to 2000 bytes, with the default value of 1522.

Bound

bandwidth

63 x VC-12

Mapping

granularitie

s

VC-12

Encapsulati

on formats

HDLC Not supported.

LAPS Not supported.

GFP-F Supported.





151



Functionand Feature

Description

MPLS

technology

Not supported.

VLAN

technology

Supported.

Maximum

uplink

bandwidth

The maximum uplink bandwidth is 155 Mbit/s.

VCTRUN

K

specificatio

ns

Number: 16

Configuration features:

l The bound services are VC-12s.

l A maximum of 16 VC-12s can be bound to oneVCTRUNK.

Protection

schemes

TPS Not supported.

BPS Not supported.

PPS Not supported.

DLAG Supported.

LAG Supported.

LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042, the LCAS function

realizes the dynamic increase/decrease and protection of the

bandwidth.

LPT Supports point-point and point-multipoint LPT.

STP/RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and the RSTP in

compliance with IEEE 802.1w.

MSTP Not supported.

Clock

synchronizati

on

Synchrono

us Ethernet

Not supported.

IEEE

1588v2

Not supported.

Maintenance

features

ETH-OAM l Meet IEEE 802.1ag: continuity check (CC) test, unicast

loopback (LB) test, link trace (LT) test, network loop

detect (LD), auto-negotiation, fault diagnosis, and link

performance test.

l Meet IEEE 802.3ah: network loop detect (LD), continuity

check (CC) test, unicast loopback (LB) test, link trace (LT)

test, network loop detect (LD), auto-negotiation, fault

diagnosis, and link performance test.





152



Functionand Feature

Description

Test frame Supports test frames in Ethernet bearer mode.

Responseto ping

Does not allow the board IP address to be specified or queried.

Port

mirroring

Supports the mirroring of ports

Loopback

capability

PHY layer at

Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

MAC layer at

Ethernet ports

Supports inloops.

VC-4 level Not supported.



Ethernet

performanc

e

monitoring

(RMON)


Warm

resets

Supported

Cold resets Supported

Alarms and

performanc

e events

Provides rich alarms and performance events to facilitate


QoS l Supports CAR. The service granularity is 64 kbit/s.

l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID,

PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, PORT+SVLAN and PORT+CVLAN

+SVLAN.

IGMP

snooping

Supported.

Traffic

control

Supports the traffic control based on ports in compliance with IEEE 802.3x.

5.1.3 Application

The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission

platform.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:





153



l EPL Service

l EVPL Service

l EPLAN Service

l EVPLAN Service

l EoPDH Service

EPL Service

The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown

in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node

through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-

healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.

Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port

VCTRUNK 1PORT1

PORT2

VCTRUNK 1

VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

POTR1

A

NE 1 NE 2

BPORT2

OptiX OSN

equipmentEnterprise

user

A

B

EVPL Service

The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.

l Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.

As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to

VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The two

traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.





154



Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services

Headquarters of company A

OptiX OSN

equipmentEnterprise

user

NE 1 NE 2

PORT1

PORT2

VLAN100

PORT1

VLAN100

VLAN200VLAN200

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

Department 1

Department 2

l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 3500 adopts three ways to realize

convergence and distribution of EVPL services.

– EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.

– EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.

– EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

Community

user

Cyber cafe

user

OptiX OSN

equipment

VCTRUNK

A A'

NE 1 NE 2

B

VLAN100

VLAN200

VLAN100

VLAN200

1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2

B'





155



Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS

NE 1 NE 2

PPE P PE

VCTRUNK1

PORT2

PORT1PORT1

PORT2

`

Add label

Department B

Department

A

Branch 1

Company AOptiX OSN

equipment

Strip label

Branch 2

Department B

Department A

Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ

NE 1 NE 2

VCTRUNK1

PORT2

PORT1PORT1

PORT2

`

C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware

Company A OptiX OSN

equipment

Add label Strip label

DepartmentB

Department

A

Branch 1 Branch 2

DepartmentB

Department A

EPLAN Service

Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a

bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of

Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.

Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control

(MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are

transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown

in Figure 5-6.





156



Figure 5-6 EPLAN service

NE 1 NE 2

NE31

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

VCTRUNK1

PORT1

VCTRUNK1

PORT1

PORT1 VB

VB

VB

Port 1

Department 3 of

company A

Port 1

Department 1 of

company A

Access

pointCompany A

OptiX OSN

equipment

Port 1

Department 2 of

company A

EVPLAN Service

The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same

VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed

into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the

service requirements.

As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopt VB+S-

VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.





157



Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service

NE 1 NE 2

NE3

PORT1PORT2

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2

LSP LSP PORT1

PORT2

V C T R

U N

K 1

P O R T 1

P O R T 2

V C T R

U N

K 2

S-Aware S-Aware

S-Aware

C-AwareS-Aware

C-Aware

VB

VB

VB

Port 1

Department 3

of company B

Department 3

of company A

Port 2

Port 1

Port 1

Port 2

Department 2

of company BDepartment 2

of company ADepartment 1

of company B

Department 1

of company A

Acess

pointCompany A Company B

OptiX OSN

equipment

Port 2

C-Aware

EoPDH

The Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) technology enables the FE signal to be transmitted over the

PDH network without multiple conversions. Thus, the network performance is improved.

The current network cannot directly access the FE signal from the equipment such as NodeB.

Specifically, before being transmitted over the PDH network, the FE signal is converted to the

E1 signal by the conversion equipment. Then, before entering the RNC, the signal is converted

back to the FE signal and split from the E1 signal by the conversion equipment. The EoPDH

technology, however, realizes the access and separation of the FE signal, thus optimizing the

network structure and improving the network performance.

Figure 5-8 shows how to process the FE signal over the current network.

Figure 5-8 Typical networking diagram before the EoPDH technology is used

NodePDH

network

Conversion

equipment

BTS

E1

FE

E1

E1

Conversion

equipment

E1

FE

E1 E1

SDH

network

Metro equipment OSN equipment

RNC





158



Figure 5-9 shows how to process the FE signal over a network using the EoPDH technology.

Figure 5-9 Typical networking diagram after the EoPDH technology is used

Node

PDH

network

BTS

E1

FE

E1 E1

Access-layer equipment

SDH

network

Convergence-layer equipment

STM-1 FE

RNC

Metro equipment OSN equipment

E1

On the OptiX OSN 3500, the N1EFP0 board can work with the N1ETF8 or N1EFF8 board todirectly split the FE signal from the E1 signal.

As shown in Figure 5-9, the FE signal from NodeB is accessed to the Metro equipment. On the

Metro equipment, the board with the EoPDH function enabled converses the FE signal to the

E1 signal and then transmits the E1 signal to the PDH network. Then, the equipment at the access

layer transparently transmits the E1 signal. At the convergence layer, the N1EFP0 board works

with the N1ETF8 board to split the FE signal from the E1 signal and then transmits the signal

to the RNC.

CAUTION

The N1EFP0 board must work with the interface board to realize the access and separation of

the the FE signal.

5.1.4 Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection for Ethernet services.

The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:

l LCAS

– The LCAS allows the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of

the concatenated VCs, the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not

damaged during the dynamic change), protects and restores failed members.

– For details, refer to LCAS in Feature Description.

l STP/RSTP

– The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning

tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the

network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link

protection by restructuring the topology.

– For details, refer to STP and RSTP in Feature Description.

l MSTP





159



– The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is one type of spanning tree protocols.

The MSTP is compatible with the STP and RSTP, and fixes the defects of the STP and

RSTP. The convergence rate of the MSTP is rapid. In addition, traffic of different

VLANs is transmitted over their respective trails, which provides a good load sharing

mechanism.

– For details, refer to MSTP in Feature Description.

l Tributary protection switching (TPS)

– The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected

board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the

reliable operation of the equipment.

– For details, see 7.1.1 TPS Protection.

l Board protection switching (BPS)

– The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby

board. When the active board detects a link-down failure of any port, or detects a board

hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active boardto the standby board to realize the service protection.

– For details, see BPS in Feature Description.

l Port protection switching (PPS)

– The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby

board. When the active board detects a link-down failure of any port, or detects a board

hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected

ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is

not necessary.

– For details, see PPS in Feature Description.

l Link aggregation group (LAG)

– A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same

equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability.

– For details, see LAG in Feature Description.

l DLAG

– The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the

protection board. During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other

ports are not switched. The DLAG can be of two modes: revertive and non-revertive.

– For details, see DLAG in Feature Description.

l LPT

– The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. On a network,when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT

function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT

function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working

link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby

port. Thus, these services are protected.

– For details, see LPT in Feature Description.

l Data DNI

– The data DNI protection mainly applies to the intersection points of the access ring and

the convergence ring and provides equipment-level protection for intersection points.

–Different from the conventional SDH DNI networking, the data DNI protection addsthe data board N1EGS2A or N4EGS4 on the NEs at the intersection points. As a result,





160



the accessed VC-12 services are integrated into VC-4 services and then transmitted to

the RNC through the convergence ring and backbone ring.

– The data DNI protection efficiently saves bandwidth in the 3G networking. For details

on the data DNI, see STP and RSTP in the Feature Description.

The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP

and SNCTP schemes. For details, see 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.

5.2 RPR Features

The RPR of the OptiX OSN 3500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can quickly recover

Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.

The main features of the RPR are as follows:

l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.

l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.

l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the

destination node.

l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.

l Provide RPR protection.

The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse

directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and

control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner

ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ringcarry the control information on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other.

Figure 5-10 RPR ring

Outer ring control

Node 1

Node 4

Node 3

Node 2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Inner ring data

Outer ring data

Inner ring control





161



5.2.1 Functions

The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial

reuse, and fairness algorithm.

Basic Functions

On the OptiX OSN 3500, the EMR0 and EGR2 boards support the RPR feature defined by IEEE

802.17.

Table 5-13 provides the functions and features of the EMR0.

Table 5-13 Functions and features of the EMR0

Function andFeature

EMR0

Basic functions Transmits/Receives and processes 12xFE services and 1xGEservices.

Supports the RPR feature.

Functions when

being used with the

interface board

l Supports four FE ports and one GE port.

l Transmits/Receives 12xFE signals through the electrical interface

when the EMR0 is used with the ETF8.

l Transmits/Receives 8xFE signals through the optical interface

when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.

Specifications of the

optical interface

l Supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX signals when the EMR0 is

used with the ETF8. The maximum transmission distance is 100m.

l Supports 100BASE-FX signals in compliance with IEEE 802.3u

when the EMR0 is used with the EFF8.

Format of service

frames

l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats.


bytes.


Maximum uplink

bandwidth

2.5 Gbit/s

The EMR0 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-3, VC3-2v, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X≤8) granularities.

Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.





162



Function andFeature

EMR0

EVPL services l Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II,

IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini.

l Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT

or PORT+VLAN.

l Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP,

transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.

l Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.

EVPLAN services l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN

encapsulation.

l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The

capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version is

64K. The capacity of the MAC address table in the N1 functionalversion is 16K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and

queried.

l Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the

static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum of

the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses

in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.

l Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum

of 4K static MAC routes can be configured.



maximum number of VBs supported by the N2EMR0 is 16. Themaximum number of logical ports for each VB is 32.

MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518

bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, in the case of

the FE ports, the length of the packets that exit the IP ports is restricted

by the pre-set MTU; in the case of the GE ports, the length of the

packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

MPLS Supports MartinioE.

Stack VLAN Supports the stack VLAN.

VLAN l Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, andexchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.

l Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.

Link aggregation

function

Supports the aggregation of the links of a maximum of eight FE ports.





163



Function andFeature

EMR0

RPR l Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.

l Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, andsupports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness

algorithm.

l Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR,

and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which can

display the network status in real time.

l Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping,

and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less than

50 ms.

l Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports

the learning of mapping between MAC addresses and node

numbers.

l The N2EMR0 supports the manual configuration of routes for the

services on the RPR ring network.

RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply

with IEEE 802.1w.


QoS function l Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.

l The N2EMR0 supports the flow classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the


Flow control function Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with

IEEE 802.3x.

Echo test frames Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function,

which is used to test the connectivity of the link.

Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).

Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network

level:l STP/RSTP

l LCAS

l LAG

Ethernet

performance

monitoring


Alarms and

performance events



Warm resets Not supported





164



Function andFeature

EMR0


Weighted fairnessalgorithm

Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.

Automatic discovery

of topologies

Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.

Maximum number of

supported nodes

255

Service priority

levels

Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

Table 5-14 provides the functions and features of the EGR2.

Table 5-14 Functions and features of the EGR2

Function andFeature

EGR2

Basic functions Transmits/Receives and processes 2xGE services.

Supports the RPR feature.

Functions when being used with the

interface board

Transmits/Receives 2xGE signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.

Specifications of the

optical interface

l The optical interfaces are 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/VX Ethernet

optical interfaces.

l The optical interfaces support the auto-negotiation function in

compliance with IEEE 802.3z.

l The optical interfaces use the SFP optical module and support hot

swapping.

– When the multi-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum

transmission distance is 550 m.

– When the single-mode optical fiber is used, the maximum

transmission distance is 10 km.

– The optical modules that can meet different requirements for

the transmission distance such as 40 km and 80 km can also be

used.

Format of service

frames

l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1q TAG formats.


bytes.






165



Function andFeature

EGR2

Maximum uplink

bandwidth

2.5 Gbit/s

The EGR2 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-3, VC3-2v, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X≤8) granularities.

Encapsulation

format

Supports the GFP-F and LAPS protocols.

EVPL services l Supports EVPL services. The frame format can be Ethernet II,

IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG, or MPLS Martini.

l Supports the MPLS encapsulation and forwarding based on PORT

or PORT+VLAN.

l Supports five types of LSPs, including ingress LSP, egress LSP,

transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.

l Supports a maximum of 512 LSPs.

EVPLAN services l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN

encapsulation.

l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The

capacity of the MAC address table in the N2 functional version is

64K. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried.

l Supports the blacklist that can contain 4K records and also the

static MAC address table that can contain 4K records. The sum of

the number of records in the blacklist and the number of addresses

in the static MAC address table must not exceed 4K.

l Supports the configuration of the static MAC routes. A maximum

of 4K static MAC routes can be configured.



maximum number of supported VBs is 16. The maximum number

of logical ports for each VB is 32.

MTU Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518

bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the

packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU.

MPLS Supports MartinioE.

Stack VLAN Supports the stack VLAN.

VLAN l Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the addition, deletion, and

exchanging of VLAN tags in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.

l Supports the replacement of VLAN tags in Ethernet signal frames.

Link aggregation

function

Supports the aggregation of the links of two GE ports.





166



Function andFeature

EGR2

RPR l Supports the RPR feature that complies with IEEE 802.17.

l Supports a maximum of 255 nodes on the ring network, andsupports stripping at the destination node and weighted fairness

algorithm.

l Supports five priority levels, including A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR,

and C, and supports automatic discovery of topologies, which can

display the network status in real time.

l Supports three protection modes, including Steering, Wrapping,

and Wrapping+Steering. Hence, the signal failure time is less than

50 ms.

l Supports the manual configuration of routes for the services on the

RPR ring network.

l Supports the self-learning of routes on the ring, that is, supports

the learning of mapping between MAC addresses and node

numbers.

RSTP Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply

with IEEE 802.1w.



l Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN

ID, or PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.

LCAS function Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the


LPT function Supports the P2MP LPT.

Flow control

function

Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with

IEEE 802.3x.

IEEE 1588v2 Not supported.

Echo test frames Supports the echo function specified in the RPR OAM function, which

is used to test the connectivity of the link.

Port mirroring Does not support port mirroring.

Loopback function Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).

Protection schemes Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet network

level:

l STP/RSTP

l LCAS

l LPT

l LAG





167



Function andFeature

EGR2

Ethernet

performance

monitoring


Alarms and

performance events



Warm resets Not supported


Weighted fairness

algorithm

Supports the weighted fairness algorithm.

Automatic discovery

of topologies

Supports the automatic discovery of topologies.

Maximum number of

supported nodes

255

Service priority

levels

Supports A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C.

Service Class

The user data is classified into three classes: A, B, and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed

information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.

Table 5-15 lists the differences among these classes.

Table 5-15 RPR service class

Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter FairnessAlgorithm

Application

A A0 Pre-allocated,

irreclaimable

Low Irrelevant Real-time

services

A1 Pre-allocated,

reclaimable

Low Irrelevant Real-time

services

B B_CIR Pre-allocated,

reclaimable

Medium Irrelevant Near real-time

services

B_EIR Preemptible, not

pre-allocated

High Relevant Near real-time

services

C C Preemptible, not

pre-allocated

High Relevant Best effort

transmission





168



Topology Auto-Discovery

The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly

discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Thus, the topology

auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.

To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which

realizes the dynamic increase and decrease in bandwidth without affecting the existing services.

Spatial Reuse

On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for

ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic

1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the

bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at

a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this manner, the bandwidth utilization is improved.

Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse

Node 1

Bandwidth of single ring is

1.25Gbit/s

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Traffic 1

1.25 Gbit/s

Traffic 2

1.25 Gbit/s

Fairness Algorithm

The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm.

The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight

in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates.

Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of

preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits

lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.

As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer

ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/

s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class servicestransmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.





169



Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2,

3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates

200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from

Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

1

2

2

3

Traffic Bandwidth

400 Mbit/s

400 Mbit/s

400 Mbit/s

1

Node3

Node4

Node Weight

Node2 1

1

1

Node 3

3

Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

1

2

Node 3

3

Node3

Node4

Node Weight

Node2 1

3

2

2

3

Traffic Bandwidth

400 Mbit/s

600 Mbit/s

200 Mbit/s

1

5.2.2 Application

The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.





170



EVPL Service

The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates

and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.

Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node

3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.

Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based

on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.

Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping

Node 1

Node 3

Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Action

Tunnel

VC

Destination

Insertion

100

100

Node 4

LSP Action

Tunnel

VC

Stripping

100

100

Action Forwarding

Node 4FE/GEFE/GE

Node 2

Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence

Node 1

Node 3

Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

FE

FE

GE

Node 2 Node 4

Traffic Tunnel Destination

Port1+VLAN 2

VC

200 Node 2200

Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3300

Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4400

FE

VLAN 2

VLAN 3

VLAN 4

VLAN 4

VLAN 3VLAN 2





171



EVPLAN Service

The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and

encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized

by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC

addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.

Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are

accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding

port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the

packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the

packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are

forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100.

Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.

Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service

A2

Node 1

Node 3

Dual-ring

2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 2 Node 4

MAC stack VLAN Port

A1 none

A2 noneport 2

B1 100rpr1

Port 1

B2 100rpr1

C1 100rpr1

Port 2

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1

A1

B1

B2

C1

port 1

MAC forwarding table of node 1

MAC forwarding table of node 2

A2

MAC stack VLAN Port

A1 100

A2 100rpr1

B1 noneport 1

B2 noneport 2

C1 100rpr1

rpr1

5.2.3 Protection

The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.

The protection schemes of the RPR services include:

l Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering

– When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic

loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and

the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this

protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the

disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.

– In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the

source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated

by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this





172



protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when

the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is

discarded before a new route is generated.

– In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first

performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packetloss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring

performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the

best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.

– For details, refer to RPR in Feature Description.

l LCAS

– The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the

bandwidth.

– For details, refer to LCAS in Feature Description.

l RSTP

– The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes

link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically

modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.

– For details, refer to STP and RSTP in Feature Description.

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP And SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP,

SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.

For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.

5.3 ATM Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the ATM over SDH. By using the ATM service processing board,

the equipment can encapsulate the voice, data, and video services into the ATM cells of a fixed

length at the transmit end, transmit the cells on the SDH virtual path at a high rate, and

decapsulate the cells to recover the services at the receive end. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports

the ATM services that use the bandwidth exclusively, the ATM services that share the

bandwidth, and the IMA services.

5.3.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides six ATM processing boards, namely, the ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4,

IDQ1, IDL4A, and IDQ1A (the ID series boards support the IMA function).

The ADL4 can access and process 1xSTM-4 ATM service, and the ADQ1 can access and process

4xSTM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3, N1PL3A, or N1PD3, the ADL4 and

ADQ1 can access and process the E3 ATM service.

The IDL4 can access and process 1xSTM-4 ATM service, and the IDQ1 can access and process

4xSTM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 board, the IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and

process the inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA) service.

Table 5-16 provides the functions and features of the ADL4.





173



Table 5-16 Functions and features of the ADL4

Function andFeature

ADL4

Basic functions Transmits/Receives and processes 1xSTM-4 ATM services.

Type of optical

interface

Supports the following types of optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2 and Ve-4.2.

Connector type LC

Type of optical module SFP

E3 ATM interface Supports 12xE3 signals, which are accessed through the PD3, PL3,

or N1PL3A.

IMA function Does not support the IMA function.

Maximum uplink bandwidth

Supports a bandwidth of 8xVC-4s, or a bandwidth of 12xVC-3sand 4xVC-4s.

NOTEOnly VC-4s numbered 5-8 support the binding of VC-3 paths.

ATM switching

capability

Unidirectional: 1.2 Gbit/s; bidirectional: 600 Mbit/s

Mapping granularities Supports VC-3, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X = 1–4) granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.

Number of supported

ATM connections

2048

Statistical multiplexing Supports the statistical multiplexing.

Flow types and QoS Complies with IETF RFC2514 and ATM forum TM4.0.

ATM multicast

connection

Supports the spatial multicast and logical multicast.

ATM protection (ITU-

T I.630)

Supports the unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1, unidirectional/

bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring protection schemes.

OAM functions (ITU-T

I.610)

Supports the AIS, RDI, LB, and CC.

Maintenance features Supports inloops at the ATM layer and on optical interfaces.

Supports outloops at the ATM layer.

These features can be used to locate faults quickly.

Alarms and

performance events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used

to locate faults and maintain the equipment.

Table 5-17 provides the functions and features of the ADQ1.





174



Table 5-17 Functions and features of the ADQ1

Function andFeature

ADQ1


Type of optical

interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the

Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the

optical interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply

with ITU-T G.957. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of

the Ie-1 and Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards defined by

Huawei.

Connector type LC

Optical module type SFP

E3 ATM interface Supports 12xE3 signals, which are accessed through the PD3, PL3,or N1PL3A.

IMA function Does not support the IMA function.

Maximum uplink

bandwidth

Supports a bandwidth of 8xVC-4s, or a bandwidth of 12xVC-3s and

4xVC-4s.


ATM switching

capability


Mapping granularities Supports VC-3, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X = 1–4) granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR.

Number of supported

ATM connections

2048

Statistical

multiplexing

Supports the statistical multiplexing.


ATM multicast

connection


ATM protection (ITU-

T I.630)



OAM functions (ITU-

T I.610)


Maintenance features Supports inloops at the ATM layer and on optical interfaces.



Alarms and

performance events







175



Table 5-18 provides the functions and features of the IDL4.

Table 5-18 Functions and features of the IDL4

Function andFeature

IDL4


Type of optical

interface

Supports the following types of optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2

and Ve-4.2.

Connector type LC

Optical module type SFP

E3 ATM interface Does not support the E3 ATM interface.

IMA functions

(ATM Forum IMA

1.1)

l Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDL4

is used with the E1 service processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM.

l Supports a maximum of 63 E1 IMA services.

l Supports the mapping between ATM ports and a maximum of 16

IMA groups. Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 signals.


E1 links that belong to non-IMA groups.

l Supports the maximum IMA multichannel delay of 226 ms.

Maximum uplink

bandwidth


7xVC-4s.

NOTEOnly the first VC-4 supports the binding of VC-12 paths.

ATM switching

capability


Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-12, VC-4, VC4-Xc (X = 1–4), and VC12-Xv (X = 1–

32) granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR.

Number of supported

ATM connections

2048

Statistical

multiplexing



ATM multicast

connection


ATM protection

(ITU-T I.630)







176



Function andFeature

IDL4

Board-level 1+1

protection

Supports the board-level 1+1 protection.

OAM functions

(ITU-T I.610)


Maintenance

features

Supports inloops at the ATM layer and on optical interfaces.



Alarms and

performance events



Note: The IMA function can encapsulate ATM cells into E1 signals. The IMA group can

coexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization. The IMA group can also be used to converge

2 Mbit/s services and to interconnect with other IMA equipment.

Table 5-19 provides the functions and features of the IDL4A.

Table 5-19 Functions and features of the IDL4A

Function andFeature

IDL4A


Type of optical

interface

Supports the following types of optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2

and Ve-4.2.

Connector type LC/PC, which is applicable to the long-distance and short-distance

lasers.

Optical module

type

SFP and ESFP


IMA functions

(ATM Forum

IMA 1.1)

l Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDL4A


l Supports a maximum of 189 IMA E1 services.





l Supports the IMA multichannel delay ranging from 25 ms to 226

ms.





177



Function andFeature

IDL4A

Maximum uplink

bandwidth

l Supports a bandwidth of 8xVC-4s, or a bandwidth of 189xVC-12s

and 5xVC-4s.

l Supports an SDH bandwidth of 8xVC-4s on the TDM cross-connect

side and ensures the access bandwidth of 4xVC-4s of the 622 Mbit/

s slot.

l The IDL4A can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.


ATM switching

capability

Bidirectional: 900 Mbit/s

Unidirectional: 1.8 Gbit/s

Capacity of the

ATM ring

600 Mbit/s

Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-12, VC-4, and VC4-Xv (X = 1–4) granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, and UBR+.

Number of

supported ATM

connections

8192

Statistical

multiplexing


Flow types and

QoS

Complies with IETF RFC2514 and ATM forum TM4.0.

ATM multicast

connection

Does not support the ATM multicast connection.

ATM protection

(ITU-T I.630)

Supports the unidirectional/bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring

protection schemes.

PPS protection Supports the intra-board PPS protection and inter-board PPS

protection.

OAM functions(ITU-T I.610)


Clock tracing When the optical interface is connected to the RNC, the optical interface

supports the input and output of the clock source.

Maintenance

features




Alarms and

performance

events

Reports various alarms and performance events, which can be used to

locate faults and maintain the equipment.





178



Function andFeature

IDL4A


coexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the

bandwidth to improve the bandwidth utilization. The IMA group can also be used to converge


Table 5-20 provides the functions and features of the IDQ1.

Table 5-20 Functions and features of the IDQ1

Function andFeature

IDQ1


Type of optical

interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ie-1,

S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the optical

interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T

G.957. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and

Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.

Connector type LC

Optical module

type

SFP


IMA functions

(ATM Forum

IMA 1.1)

l Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDQ1 is

used with the E1 service processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQM.

l Supports a maximum of 63 E1 IMA services.





l Supports the maximum IMA multichannel delay of 226 ms.

Maximum uplink

bandwidth


7xVC-4s. The IDQ1 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

NOTEOnly the first VC-4 supports the binding of VC-12 paths.

ATM switching

capability


Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-12, VC-4, VC4-Xc (X = 1–4), and VC12-Xv (X = 1–32)

granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.





179



Function andFeature

IDQ1

Number of

supported ATM

connections

2048

Statistical

multiplexing


Flow types and

QoS


ATM multicast

connection


ATM protection

(ITU-T I.630)

Supports unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1, unidirectional/bidirectional

1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring protection schemes.

Board-level 1+1

protection

Supports the board-level 1+1 protection.

OAM functions

(ITU-T I.610)


Maintenance

features




Alarm and

performance event




coexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the



Table 5-21 provides the functions and features of the IDQ1A.

Table 5-21 Functions and features of the IDQ1A

Function andFeature

IDQ1A


Type of optical

interface

Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ie-1,

S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2. The characteristics of the optical

interfaces of the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types comply with ITU-T

G.957. l The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the Ie-1 and

Ve-1.2 types comply with the standards defined by Huawei.





180



Function andFeature

IDQ1A

Connector type LC/PC, which is applicable to the long-distance and short-distance

lasers.

Optical module

type

SFP and ESFP


IMA functions

(ATM Forum

IMA 1.1 standard)

l Transmits/Receives and processes IMA services when the IDQ1A


l Supports a maximum of 189 IMA E1 services.



lSupports the mapping between ATM ports and a maximum of 93E1 links that belong to non-IMA groups.

l Supports the IMA multichannel delay ranging from 25 ms to 226

ms.

Maximum uplink

bandwidth


5xVC-4s. The IDQ1A can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.


ATM switching

capability

Bidirectional: 900 Mbit/s

Unidirectional: 1.8 Gbit/s

Capacity of the

ATM ring

600 Mbit/s

Mapping

granularities

Supports VC-12, VC-4, and VC4-Xc (X = 1–4) granularities.

Service types Supports the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR, and UBR+.

Number of

supported ATM

connections

8192

Statisticalmultiplexing


Flow types and

QoS


ATM multicast

connection

Does not support the ATM multicast connection.

ATM protection

(ITU-T I.630)

Supports the unidirectional/bidirectional 1:1, VP-Ring, and VC-Ring

protection schemes.

PPS protection Supports the inter-board PPS protection and intra-board PPS

protection.





181



Function andFeature

IDQ1A

OAM functions

(ITU-T I.610)

Supports the AIS, RDI, LB , and CC.

Clock tracing

function

When the optical interface is interconnected with the RNC, the optical

interface supports the input and output of the clock source.

Maintenance

features




Alarms and

performance

events



Note: The IMA function can encapsulate ATM cells into E1 signals. The IMA group cancoexist with a single E1 signal. The IMA group can dynamically increase or decrease the



5.3.2 Application

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.

Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not support

ABR services.

l The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services

of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and

latency.

l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.

l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.

l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.

In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514,

ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-22.

Table 5-22 ATM service types and traffic types

No. Traffic Type ServiceType

Parameter

1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None

2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr

CBR Clp01Pcr





182



No. Traffic Type ServiceType

Parameter

3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr

4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr

5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs

6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs

7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs

8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM ServicesWhen the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing

board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH

timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM

service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are

converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.

As shown in Figure 5-17, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a

VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4

bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services

reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the

622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.





183



Figure 5-17 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services

2.5 Gbit/s SDH

Ring

NE 2 NE 4

NE 1

NE 3

34M ATM

34M ATM

Traffic

155M ATM622M ATM

Service

Convergence

DSLAM

DSLAM

Router

DSLAM

Traffic

Traffic

Traffic

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for

ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv)

path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.

As shown in Figure 5-18, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it

to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the

traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2

accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching

and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2

for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream

are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3

and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.

Figure 5-18 VP-Ring/VC-Ring

VC4-Xv

VP/VC-Ring

NE 2

NE 4

NE 1

NE 3

34M ATM

Traffic

34M ATM

Traffic

155M ATM

Traffic

622M ATM

Traffic

The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to

the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring

after converged with local service.

DSLAM

DSLAM

Router

DSLAM





184



Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integratedcell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to

recover the original integrated cell flow.

The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the

E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service

types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently

transmitted.

The IMA technology is used to access lower rate ATM services.

Figure 5-19 illustrates the IMA service networking. Node B1 uses the IMA technology to

encapsulate the ATM cell flow into several E1 links. On the link between Node B1 and NE2,

the E1 links are combined into an STM-1 channel (one STM-1 channel can carry up to 63 IMA

E1 services) and are then transmitted to NE2. After travelling through the link between NE2 and

NE1 and the link between NE1 and RNC, the ATM cell flow finally arrives at RNC.

With the IMA technology, an STM-1 channel can carry multiple E1 signals of the ATM cell

flow. In this manner, the bandwidth utilization is improved.

Figure 5-19 IMA service networking

STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP

ring

NMS

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

25km

35km 30km

40km

RNC

NodeB 1

NodeB 3

NodeB 2

NodeB 4

5.3.3 Protection

The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.

The protections that are available are as follows:





185



l ATM layer protections

– The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a

combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1

bidirectional non-revertive protection.

– For details, refer to ATM and IMA in Feature Description.

l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

– The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical

transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and

SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way,

when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical

transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the

working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not

performed).

– For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.

l1+1 board-level protection for IMA boards– The IDQ1, IDQ1, IDL4, and IDL4A boards support the 1+1 board-level protection.

– The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be

configured.

– The N1IDL4A and N1IDQ1A boards support the PPS. When the PPS needs to be

configured.

– For details, refer to ATM and IMA in Feature Description.

5.4 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN

3500.

5.4.1 Functions

The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface

board to access and process DDN services.

Table 5-23 provides the functions and features of the DX1.

Table 5-23 Functions and features of the DX1

FunctionandFeature

DX1

Basic

functions

l Processes eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s services and eight channels of

framed E1 services.

l Cross-connects 48 channels of Nx64 kbit/s signals on the system side.

Service

processing

l Transmits/Receives eight channels of Nx64 kbit/s and eight channels of

framed E1 services and realizes the 1:N TPS protection when working with

the DM12.

l One DX1 board needs to work with two DM12 boards.





186



FunctionandFeature

DX1

Alarms and

performance

events



Maintenance

features

l Supports inloops and outloops at electrical interfaces.

l Supports the PRBS function.

l Supports the CRC function.

Connectors The DB28 connectors and DB44 connectors are present on the front panel of

the DM12. The DB28 connector is used for the Nx64 kbit/s signals, and the

DB44 connector is used for the framed E1 signals.

Protection

schemes

Supports the TPS protection when working with the interface board.

Table 5-24 provides the functions and features of the DXA.

Table 5-24 Functions and features of the DXA

Function andFeature

DXA

Basic functions Cross-connects 63 channels of framed E1 signals.

Alarms and

performance events



Maintenance

features

Supports inloops and outloops.

Supports the CRC function.

5.4.2 Application

When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured on the OptiX OSN 3500,the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.

The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various

services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed

to a transmission network.

l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers

l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

l Access and convergence of multipoint routers

The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized andmedium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.





187



As shown in Figure 5-20, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be performed

between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point transmission of

framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and branches of Company B.

The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1 services of Company B can also be

transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH network.

Figure 5-20 DDN networking and application

Enterprise user OptiX NE

4 x 64kNG-SDH

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Frame E1Frame E1

4 x 64k Headquarters

of company A

Headquarters

of company B

Branch of

company A

Branch of

company B

5.4.3 Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.

In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are

switched to the protection board. This ensures the relia ble operation of the equipment.

For details, refer to 7.1.1 TPS Protection.

5.5 SAN/Video Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,

N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.

Table 5-25 provides the functions and features of the MST4.

Table 5-25 Functions and features of the MST4

Function andFeature

MST4

Basic functions Provides four independent ports to transmit/receive multiple services.

Supports the transparent transmission of the SAN and Video services.

Connector type LC

Optical module

type

SFP





188



Function andFeature

MST4

Service types l Supports FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, and DVB-ASI services.

Table 2 describes types and rates of the services.

l Transmits/Receives four-channel FC services (FC100/FICON and

FC200) at the same time, and the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/

s.

l Supports the full-rate transmission of FC services (one-channel FC200

services or two-channel FC100 services).

l Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON or DVB-ASI services, and

the total bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.

Distance

extension

The first and second ports support the distance extension function on the

SDH side.

lFC100 services: 3000 km

l FC200 services: 1500 km

Maximum

uplink

bandwidth

2.5 Gbit/s

The backplane provides four 622 Mbit/s buses that are directly connected

to the cross-connect unit.

The MST4 can adapt to the bandwidth of the slot.

Mapping

granularity

Supports the VC-4-Xc (X = 4, 8, or 16) granularity.

ESCON

services

Transmits/Receives four-channel ESCON services, and the total

bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.

DVB-ASI

services

Transmits/Receives four-channel DVB-ASI services, and the total

bandwidth is less than 2.5 Gbit/s.

Encapsulation

format

Supports the GFP-T protocol, which complies with ITU-T G.7041.

Maintenance

features

Supports inloops and outloops on ports on the customer side, which can

be used to locate faults quickly.

Supports port-based RMON performance management.

Alarms and

performanceevents



Table 5-26 Service types and service rates supported by the MST4

Service Type Rate Remarks

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service

FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service

ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service





189



Service Type Rate Remarks

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service





190



6 ASON Features

About This Chapter

The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX

GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network

can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features.

For details of how to support ASON, refer to OptiX GCP User Guide (SDH).

6.1 CoS and Tunnels

The ASON network provides different classes of services and corresponding tunnels to meet

different customer requirements.

6.2 Automatic Discovery of the TopologiesThe automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the ASON NEs,

the control links and the TE links.

6.3 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.

6.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network

security.

6.5 Crankback Mechanism

When a route is computed successfully but fails to be created in an ASON service, the crankback

mechanism automatically keeps the ASON service away from the route that fails to be createdand attempts to create another route for the ASON service.

6.6 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points

into the ASON network.

6.7 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus

requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the

optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the

service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the

service optimization.

6.8 Service Migration


Product Description 6 ASON Features



191



The ASON software supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON

services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would

not interrupt the services.

6.9 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.

6.10 Presetting the Restoration Trail

To optimize the network planning, the ASON provides the restoration trail presetting function

so that the rerouting can be performed according to the requirement of the user when the current

service trail fails. In this manner, the controllability of service rerouting is improved.

6.11 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the

silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared

mesh restoration trail.

6.12 Shared Risk Link GroupIn the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.

6.13 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

6.14 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDH Network

An ASON network can be used with an SDH network to form a hybrid network. In this case, an

end-to-end service can be managed and created in a centralized manner.





192



6.1 CoS and Tunnels

The ASON network provides different classes of services and corresponding tunnels to meet

different customer requirements.

6.1.1 SLA

The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.

The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,

as listed in Table 6-1. The rerouting time depends on the equipment type, the number of

interrupted services, the network resources, the network settings, and other factors. Hence, the

following data is for reference only.

Table 6-1 Service level

Service Diamondservice

Gold service Silverservice

Copperservice

Iron service

Protection

and

Restoratio

n Scheme

Supports the

protection and

restoration.

Permanent

protection is

provided only if

the network

bandwidth isavailable. For

the non-

rerouting

diamond

service, the

interrupted

service cannot

be restored

even when the

bandwidth is

available.

Supports the

protection and

restoration.

The event is

protection in

most cases, but

is restoration

sometimes.

Supports

the

restoratio

n. The

trail is

computed

in real

time. The protection

trail need

not be set

in

advance.

Does not

support

the

protectio

n. The

interrupte

d service

cannot berestored.

Supports the

preemption.

After the trail is

preempted, the

service is

interrupted until

the preemption

is released.

Implement

ation

Means

SNCP and

rerouting

MSP and

rerouting

rerouting Non-

protectio

n

Non-protection





193



Service Diamondservice

Gold service Silverservice

Copperservice

Iron service

Switching

and

Rerouting

Time

l Switching

time < 50

ms

l The

rerouting

time ranges

from

hundreds of

millisecond

s to several

seconds.

l Switching

time < 50

ms

l The

rerouting

time ranges

from

hundreds of

millisecond

s to several

seconds.

The

rerouting

time

ranges

from

hundreds

of

milliseco

nds to

several

seconds.

- -

Bandwidth

utilization

Low Medium High Very high Very high

Cost Very high High Medium Low Very low

Applicable

service

type

Private lines for

banks,

securities, and

important

government

departments,

voice services

PSTN, GSM

voice services

(in the case of a

ring network)

IP data

private

lines for

common

customers

,

communit

y

broadban

d services

Temporar

y service

requirem

ents

Temporary

service

requirements

NOTE

The rerouting time of services differs in different network conditions. The major factors that affect the

rerouting time are as follows:

l Number of services.

When more services need to be rerouted at the same time, the workload of the network becomes

heavier, so the rerouting time is longer.

l Type of node equipment.

The greater processing capabilities of the node equipment, the shorter rerouting time.

l Number of hops after service rerouting.

In the service creation process, services are processed in serial mode along the trail. Therefore, if a

service travels along more hops after rerouting, the service needs to recover in a longer time.

Table 6-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.





194



Table 6-2 TE links used by ASON services

Service Level Working Resource of TELink

ProtectionResource of TELink

Non-ProtectionResource of TE Link

Diam

ond

servic

e

Service

creation

Not used Not used Used

Service

rerouting

Not used Used when the

resource is not

enough

Used with the priority

Service

optimization


Gold

servic

e

Service

creation

Used with the

priority


resource is not enough

Service

rerouting

Used with the

priority

Used when the

resource is not

enough

Used when the


Service

optimization

Used with the

priority



Silver

servic

e

Service

creation


Service

rerouting


resource is not

enough

Used with the priority

Service

optimization


Copp

er

servic

e

Service

creation


Service

optimization


Iron

servic

e

Service

creation

Not used Used with the

priority

Used when the


Service

optimization

Not used Used with the

priority

Used when the


6.1.2 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the

network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable

to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security aviation.

A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It isalso called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between





195



the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the

working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working

LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives

the service from the working LSP; otherwise, the sink node receives the service from the

protection LSP. A diamond service supports sharing of the working and protection LSPs.

Figure 6-1 shows a diamond service.

Figure 6-1 Diamond Services

:ASON NE

:User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

A

B

C

D

E

F

GH

I

Protection LSP

Working LSP

There are three types of diamond services.

l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.

Table 6-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.

l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.

Table 6-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.

Table 6-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting diamond service.

Table 6-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements for

creation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

source node and the sink node.





196




Protection and

restoration

l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available

for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the working LSP

and the other is the protection LSP.

l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved

for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service

survivability.

l Whenever a fiber cut occurs and no free resources are available,

the shared LSP can be used for a permanent 1+1 diamond

service to reroute the service successfully.

Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.

l Supports rerouting priority.

l Supports four rerouting policies:

– Use existing trails whenever possible

– Do not use existing trails whenever possible

– No rerouting constraint

– Use simulated section restoration

Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and

Scheduled revertive.

l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,

the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the

fault in the original path is rectified.

l

After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, theuser can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a

specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the

NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.

l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service

is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.

Preset restoration trail Supports the preset restoration trail.

Service migration l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent

SNCP connections.

l Supports migration between diamond services and gold

services.l Supports migration between diamond services and silver

services.

l Supports migration between diamond services and copper

services.

Service switching Supports manual switching.

Service optimization Supports service optimization.

Service association Does not support service association.

ASON server trail Support diamond ASON server trails.





197




Alarms to trigger

rerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,

AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements for

creation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node

and the sink node

Protection and

restoration

l When the protection LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting

is not triggered.

l When the working LSP fails, services are switched to the protection

LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

l When both the working and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered

to create a new LSP to restore services.

l When both the working and protection LSPs fail and no resources are

available, the shared LSP can be used for a rerouting 1+1 diamond

service to reroute the service successfully.




– Use existing trails whenever possible– Do not use existing trails whenever possible



Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduled

revertive.

l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the

service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in the

original path is rectified.

l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user can

set the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific future

time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in

the original path is rectified.

l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is not

reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.

Preset restoration

trail

Supports the preset restoration trail.





198



Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Service

migration

l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP

connections.

l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.

l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

Service

switching

Supports manual switching.

Service

optimization

Supports service optimization.

Service

association

Does not support service association.

ASON server

trail

Support diamond ASON server trails.

Alarms to trigger

rerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,

AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

Table 6-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting diamond service

Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Requirements for creation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source nodeand the sink node

Protection and

restoration

l When the working LSP fails, services are switched to the protection

LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

l When the protection LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting

is not triggered.

l When both the working and protection LSPs fail, rerouting is not

triggered.

Service

migration

l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP

connections.

l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.

l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.

l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.

Service

switching

Supports manual switching.

Service

optimization


Service

association

Does not support service association.





199



Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

ASON server

trail

Support diamond ASON server trails.

6.1.3 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond

services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.

A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-

protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON

triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails,

the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.

As shown in Figure 6-2, a gold service can be configured from A to I.

Figure 6-2 Gold services

R1

R2

R3

R4

:ASON NE

:User equipment

A

B

C

D

E

F

GH

MSP

MSP

MSP

I

Table 6-6 lists the attributes of gold services.

Table 6-6 Attributes of gold services

Attribute Gold Service

Requirements for creation Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are

available between the source node and the sink node.





200




Multiplex section

protection

l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex

section protection chain to create gold services.

l Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.

l Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear

multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.

l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold

services.

l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold

services.

Protection and restoration When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performedto protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then

triggered to restore services.







–Use simulated section restoration



l After the automatically revertive gold service is rerouted, the

service is automatically reverted to the original path if the


l After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the user

can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a

specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on

the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.

l After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service


Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and gold

services.

l Supports migration between gold services and diamond

services.

l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.

l Supports migration between gold services and copper

services.





201




Service switching Supports manual switching.


Service association Does not support service association.

ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.

Alarms to trigger

rerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)

6.1.4 Silver Services

Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver levelservice is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.

Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggers

rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.

As shown in Figure 6-3, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut,

the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence,

services are protected.

Figure 6-3 A silver service

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

ELSP after rerouting

Original LSP

Table 6-7 lists the attributes of silver services.





202



Table 6-7 Attributes of silver services

Attribute Silver Services

Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

source node and the sink node.

Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a

new LSP to restore services.










l After the automatically revertive silver service is rerouted,

the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the


l After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, the

user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at

a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days)

on the NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.

l After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the service


Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

Shared mesh restoration

trail

Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive

silver trials.

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and

silver services.

l Supports migration between diamond services and silver

services.

l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.

l Supports migration between silver services and copper

services.


Service association Supports service association.

ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.

Alarms to trigger rerouting R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

AU_AIS, AU_LOP, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)





203



6.1.5 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services

in holidays, are configured as copper services.

Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute

and are interrupted. Table 6-8 lists the attributes of copper services.

Table 6-8 Attributes of copper services

Attribute Silver Service

Requirements for

creation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source

node and the sink node.

Service restoration Does not support rerouting.

Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional

services.

l Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.

l Supports migration between copper services and gold services.

l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.

Service

optimization


Service association Supports service association.

ASON server trail Supports ASON server trails.

6.1.6 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron

services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be

configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.

An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources

or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted

and rerouting is not triggered.

l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching

occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is

recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the

iron service are all reported to the NMS.

l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are

insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond

service. Thus, the service is interrupted.

Table 6-9 lists the attributes of iron service.





204



Table 6-9 Attributes of iron services

Attribute Iron Service

Requirements

for creation

Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available

between the source node and the sink node.

Multiplex

section

protection

To create iron services, the following resources can be used:

l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP

l Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP

l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP

l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP

Service

restoration

Does not support rerouting.

Service

migration

Supports migration between iron services and permanent connections.

Service

optimization


6.1.7 Tunnels

Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON

server trails.

When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for

the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete

the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Tunnel

R1

R2

R3

R4

VC4 tunnel VC12 service

: ASON NE

: User equipment ASON domain





205



The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its

cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As

shown in Figure 6-5, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a diamond ASON

server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail.During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and

the timeslots of the line boards.

During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source

and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.

NOTE

Lower order services on an end-to-end ASON tunnel can be created by using the NMS.

Figure 6-5 Lower cross-connection

VC12

NE1 NE2

VC12 ASON server trail

VC4

VC12

Cross-

connection

Line unitTributary unit

Table 6-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

Table 6-10 Attributes of tunnels

Attribute DiamondTunnel

Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel CopperTunnel

Requireme

nts for

creation

Same as diamond

services

Same as gold

services

Same as silver

services

Same as copper

services

Service

restoration

Same as diamond

services

Same as gold

services

Same as silver

services

Does not

support

rerouting

Rerouting l Supports

rerouting

lockout.

l Supports

rerouting

priority.

l Supports

rerouting

lockout.

l Supports

rerouting

priority.

l Supports

rerouting

lockout.

l Supports

rerouting

priority.

Does not

support

rerouting





206



Attribute DiamondTunnel

Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel CopperTunnel

Revertive Supported Supported Supported Not supported

Pre-configurati

on of

restoring

route

Supported Supported Supported Not supported

Service

association

Not supported Not supported Supported Supported

Service

migration

l Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.

l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels.

l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels.

l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels.

l Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.

l Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.

l Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.

Service

optimizatio

n


Tunnel

level

VC-4

6.2 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the ASON NEs,

the control links and the TE links.

Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs

In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the

protocol packets.

After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information about the

neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain has the information about

all ASON NEs in the entire network.

l When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to automatically

discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.

l When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power off the NE,

remove the SCC board, or shut down the physical channel), other NEs are able to

automatically detect the missing of this NE.





207



Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.

When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF

protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control linksto the entire network. See Figure 6-6. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control

links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control

topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest

route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used

for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.

Figure 6-6 Auto-discovery of control links

ASON Domain

When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover

the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management

system for real-time display. See Figure 6-7.





208



Figure 6-7 Management of control topology

R1

R2

R3

R4

: ASON NE

: User equipment

Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.

After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE

link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network

through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide

resource topology, which provides the service topology information for computing routes.

ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and

addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to NMS,

which performs a real-time refresh.

As shown in Figure 6-8, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed

on the NM in real time.





209



Figure 6-8 TE link auto-discovery

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

6.3 End-to-End Service ConfigurationThe ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.

The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To

configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth

requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes

are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node,

explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.

Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and

signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.

For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in

Figure 6-9. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection

at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates

the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.

The service is created as follows:

l Choose the bandwidth granularity.

l Choose the server level.

l Choose the source node.

l Choose the sink node.

l Create the service.





210



Figure 6-9 End-to-end service configuration

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2R3

R4

A

B

C

D

E

F

GH

I

6.4 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network

security.

The mesh networking, one of the major networking modes of an ASON system, provides the

following benefits:

l Flexibility and scalability

l Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need

to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly

large bandwidth demand.

l This networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each service so it

can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.

As shown in Figure 6-10, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates

another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.





211



Figure 6-10 Service restoration in mesh networking mode

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

6.5 Crankback MechanismWhen a route is computed successfully but fails to be created in an ASON service, the crankback

mechanism automatically keeps the ASON service away from the route that fails to be created

and attempts to create another route for the ASON service.

The flooding of network routing information requires a certain period of time. When a rerouting

event occurs, the ingress node possibly computes the relevant route based on the outdated

network status information. At this time, the selected route may be unavailable, therefore causing

a rerouting failure.

The ASON software supports the crankback rerouting mechanism. When a connection is set up

according to the computed route, the ASON software notifies the ingress node of the blocking

node or the route-associated information if the connection setup process is blocked due to

insufficient network resources or network faults. Then, the ingress node immediately computes

another route that meets the constraint conditions and avoids the blocking node, and sets up the

connection, therefore effectively recovering the rerouting function.

The OptiX OSN equipment supports a maximum number of three attempts (one attempt by

default), which can be set on the NMS, for the crankback mechanism.

6.6 Service AssociationThe service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points

into the ASON network.

Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During

the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the

associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed fromtwo points.





212



As shown in Figure 6-11, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between

B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.

Figure 6-11 Service association

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

1+1 protection

1+1 protection

When the resources are not sufficient, the associated trails sharing function is automatically used

for the associated service and thus improves the survivability of the service. When this function

is used for the associated service, the association of the services cannot be cancelled. Hence,

you need to optimize the route for the service before cancelling the association.

Table 6-11 lists the attributes of service association.

Table 6-11 Attributes of service association

Attribute Service Association

Service creation Supports the creation of associated services on the same ingress node or

different ingress nodes.

Service

optimization

Supports optimization of associated services.

Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.

Service type l Supports the association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.

l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.

l Supports the association of two silver tunnels.

l Supports the association of two copper tunnels.

l Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.





213



6.7 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus

requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the

optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the

service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the

service optimization.

LSP optimization has the following features.

l Only manual optimization is supported.

l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.

l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.

l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,

optimization is not allowed.

l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper, iron and

tunnel services.

6.8 Service Migration

The ASON software supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON

services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would

not interrupt the services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's ASON software supports:

l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections

l Migration between gold services and permanent connections

l Migration between silver services and permanent connections

l Migration between copper services and permanent connections

l Migration between iron services and permanent connections

l Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's ASON software supports:

l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service

l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels

6.9 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.





214



Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If

the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to

the original route manually.

6.10 Presetting the Restoration TrailTo optimize the network planning, the ASON provides the restoration trail presetting function

so that the rerouting can be performed according to the requirement of the user when the current

service trail fails. In this manner, the controllability of service rerouting is improved.

The ASON supports presetting of the restoration trail for the diamond, gold, and silver ASON

services. When an ASON service is rerouted, it is switched to the preset trail if the preset trail

is available.

The ASON periodically checks whether the restoration trail is available. If the restoration trail

is not available, the ASON automatically computes a new restoration trail to replace the current

restoration trail.l After the replacement, the ASON reports the performance event related to the change of

the preset restoration trail.

l When the original restoration trail is not available and there is no substitute for it, the ASON

reports the performance event related to the unavailability of the preset restoration trail.

6.11 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the

silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared

mesh restoration trail.

When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the

resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable,

these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh

restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration

trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.

As shown in Figure 6-12, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share

the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes,

the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive

silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail

2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh

restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.





215



Figure 6-12 Shared mesh restoration trail

Revertive silver service 1

Share MESH

restoration trail 1

A B C

G

D E

F

H

Revertive silver service 2

Share MESH

restoration trail 2

Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.

l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.

l

A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute

cannot be changed.

l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of

TE links.

l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset

restoration trail.

Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.

l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources

are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used

by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.

l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources

cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort.

In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for

different services can share some resources.

6.12 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.





216



The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks,

that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted

to another link that has the same risk.

Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so

as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the samerisk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change

the SRLG attribute on the TE link Management window.

6.13 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

LCAS

LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 6-13, VCTRUNK1

is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in

path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service

of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.

Figure 6-13 LCAS (different path)

Router BRouter ANE1 NE2

VCTRUNK1

Path 1

Path 2

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As

shown in Figure 6-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet

service remains unaffected.

Figure 6-14 LCAS (same path)

Router BRouter ANE1 NE2

VCTRUNK1





217



ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP

group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services

with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.

Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON

trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails

must also be as separated as possible.

The ASON supports the distance offset check function of an ASON trail group. Due to distance

offset, the delay of ASON trails that bear data services is within the specified range for data

boards. Otherwise, the data services are interrupted, and no alarms are generated. When adding

the ASON trails that are bound on the basis of the LCAS to an ASON trail group, the ASON

software automatically checks whether the services in the ASON group meet the distance offset

requirements.

6.14 Merging an ASON Network with a Traditional SDHNetwork

An ASON network can be used with an SDH network to form a hybrid network. In this case, an

end-to-end service can be managed and created in a centralized manner.

NOTE

The protection in the ASON domain is realized through the association.

A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSPMode

A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP mode. The

connection between the SDH network and the ASON network is protected in linear MSP mode.

The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. In addition, the ASON

network can access a diamond service, a gold service, or a silver service, as shown in Figure

6-15.

Figure 6-15 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in 1+1 or 1:1 MSP

mode

1+1 or 1:1 MSP

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

ASONMSP Ring





218



A Traditional SDH Network Connected to an ASON Network in SNCP Mode

A traditional SDH network is connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode. In this case, a

service can be protected in SNCP mode. The SDH network adopts the traditional SNCP mode.

The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. As shown in Figure

6-16, the service can also be protected if two fiber cuts occur.

NOTE

The ASON services at all levels support the access of the intelligent SNCP.

Figure 6-16 A traditional SDH network connected to an ASON network in SNCP mode

SNCP Access

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

ASON

Dual-fed

selective

receiving

SNCP

SDH SDH

SNCP Access

Dual-fed

selectivereceiving

SNCP

VC-4 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network

As shown in Figure 6-17, a VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses the

ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The

SDH network is not protected.





219



Figure 6-17 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5

VC-4 VC-4

VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network

As shown in Figure 6-18, a VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses the

ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The

SDH network is not protected.

Figure 6-18 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network

VC-12VC-12

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5





220



1+1 VC-4 Services Between Traditional NEs That Cross the ASON Network

As shown in Figure 6-19, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses

the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode.

The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.

Figure 6-19 1+1 VC-4 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network

VC-4VC-4

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5

1+1 VC-12 Services Between SDH NEs That Cross the ASON Network

As shown in Figure 6-20, a 1+1 VC-12 service is created between SDH NEs 5 and 6 and crosses

the ASON network. The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode.

The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.





221



Figure 6-20 1+1 VC-12 services between SDH NEs that cross the ASON network

VC-12 VC-12

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5

VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and Traditional NEs

As shown in Figure 6-21, a VC-4 service is created between traditional NE5 and ASON NE1.

The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network is

not protected.

Figure 6-21 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

VC-4

VC-4

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5





222



VC-12 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

As shown in Figure 6-22, a VC-12 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1. The

ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network is not

protected.

Figure 6-22 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

VC-12

VC-12

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5

1+1 VC-4 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

As shown in Figure 6-23, a 1+1 VC-4 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1.

The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network

adopts the SNCP protection mode.





223



Figure 6-23 1+1 VC-4 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

VC-4

VC-4

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5

1+1 VC-12 Services Between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

As shown in Figure 6-24, a 1+1 VC-12 service is created between SDH NE5 and ASON NE1.

The ASON network adopts the intelligent protection or restoration mode. The SDH network adopts the SNCP protection mode.

Figure 6-24 1+1 VC-12 services between ASON NEs and SDH NEs

VC-12

VC-12

NE1

NE2 NE3

NE4

: ASON NE

: SDH NE

NE6 NE5





224







225



7 Protection

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection.

7.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards, 1+1

protection for power supplies and many other equipment level protections.

7.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.


Product Description 7 Protection



226



7.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards, 1+1

protection for power supplies and many other equipment level protections.

7.1.1 TPS Protection

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.

Table 7-1 the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 7-2 lists the TPS protection

parameters.

Table 7-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards

Service Type Protection Scheme Supported Boards Revertive Mode

E1/T1 Main subrack: one 1:N

protection(N≤ 8)

Extended subrack: one 1:N

protection (N≤ 8)

N1PQM, N1PQ1,

N2PQ1

Revertive

E3/T3/E4/

STM-1

Main subrack: two 1:N (N

≤ 3) protections

Extended subrack: two 1:N

(N ≤ 3) protections

N1PD3, N1PL3,

N2PQ3, N2PD3,

N2PL3, N1SPQ4,

N2SPQ4, N1SEP1

Ethernet Two 1:1 protections N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N5EFS0, N1EFS0A

DDN One 1:N protection (N ≤

8)

N1DX1

NOTEThe N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

Table 7-2 TPS protection parameters

Parameter Description

Priority 1-X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the

highest priority.

Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching and

automatic switching.





227




Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

l The clock of the working board is lost.

l The working board is offline.

l The working board is cold reset.

l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Switching time ≤ 50 ms

Revertive mode Revertive

WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units

With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe

manner.

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect

and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so

that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 7-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup

parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.

Table 7-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units


Slots for working and

protection boards

Slot 9 and slot 10



l The working board is cold reset.

l The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered.



Revertive mode Non-revertive

After successful switching, the original protection board becomes

the working board. After the original working board is recovered,

the current working board continues to be the original protection

board.

7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.





228



For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication

(SCC) functions.

The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC

is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.

Table 7-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.

Table 7-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit



protection boards

Sot 18 and slot 17



l The working board is under a cold reset.



Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection

board becomes the working board, and the original working board

becomes the protection board.

7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards

The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS, DLAG protection schemes.

The N3EGS2 board supports the 1+1 BPS protection.

When the N1EMS4 or N1EGS4 board supports the 1+1 BPS, the board can be equipped with

an optical GE module or an electrical GE module. Then, you need to set or query the BPS mode

on the NMS. Two BPS modes are available for the N1EMS4 or N1EGS4 board, namely, the

master mode and the slave mode. When the BPS mode is set to the slave mode, the N1EMS4 or

N1EGS4 board should be equipped with an electrical GE module and the switching time for the

board is 1 s.

NOTE

On the NMS, the BPS mode of the N1EMS4 or N1EGS4 board is set to the master mode by default. In this

mode, the board should be equipped with an optical GE module.

The OpitX OSN 3500 with N1IXCSA/N1IXCSB/N1FXCSA and N4GSCC supports 4032 PPS protection

pairs for lower-order services.

The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.

The N3EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.

Table 7-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.





229



Table 7-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards

Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG

Slots for

working and protection

boards

The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth of the

working board.

Switching

condition

Any of the following conditions

triggers the switching:

l The port status of the working

board is Link Down.

l The clock of the working board is

lost.

l The hardware of the working

board fails.l The working board is offline.


Any of the following conditions

triggers the switching:

l The port to be protected on the

working board is in the Link

Down state.

l The clock of the working board is

lost.

lThe hardware of the working board fails.


l The working board fails to

transmit and receive packets, but

the protection board transmits

and receives packets normally.

Switching

time

≤ 350 ms In full duplex mode: ≤ 4s

In auto-negotiation mode:≤ 500 ms

Revertive

mode

Non-revertive mode l Revertive (default)

l Non-revertive

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection switching, the

following conditions must be met.

l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode

as the protection group.

l The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers

or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.

l The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group becomes

abnormal.

CAUTION

The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the

protection group.





230



7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4, N1IDL4A, N1IDQ1, and N1IDQ1A boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board-

level 1+1 protection.

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be configured.

The N1IDL4A and N1IDQ1A boards support the PPS. When the PPS needs to be configured.

Table 7-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.

Table 7-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards



protection boards

Configured as required.


l A manual switching command is issued.


l The working board is under a cold reset.

l The power supply of the working board fails.

l The clock of the working board fails.



Switching time ≤

50 ms

7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

protection and the N+1 (N≤3) protection.





231



Table 7-7 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards


Switching condition (the switching

occurs if one condition is met)

The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is faulty.

The hardware of the ODU is faulty.

POWER_FAIL

VOLT_LOS (IF board)

RADIO_TSL_HIGH

RADIO_TSL_LOW

RADIO_RSL_HIGH

IF_INPWR_ABN

CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

R_LOC

R_LOF

R_LOS

MW_LOF

MW_RDI

The board is offline.

Switching time ≤500 ms


WTR time 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)

Table 7-8 N+1 protection for the microwave boards


Switching condition (the switching

occurs if one condition is met)

R_LOS

R_LOF

R_LOC

MS_AIS

B2_EXCB2_SD(Optional condition)

MW_LOF

The board is offline.

Switching time ≤50 ms


WTR time 300-720 seconds (generally, set it to 600 seconds)





232



7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two -48 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU or N1PIUA

or N1PIUB boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. Wheneither of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the

equipment.

If the voltage of the two external power supplies of the equipment is the same, the two PIU

boards of mutual backup separately share half of the current.

If the voltage offset value of the two external power supplies of the equipment is more than 0.7

V, all the current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has high voltage, and no

current pass the PIU board of the external power supply that has low voltage. When only one

PIU board is working, the power supply of the subrack is not affected.

NOTE

If different boards are configured, the total power consumption and current of the equipment are different,

and the current value of the PIU boards is also different. The current values of the PIU boards are computed

according to the actual configuration.

7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.

In the OptiX OSN 3500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types:

One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.

A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board

of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.

Table 7-9 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.

Table 7-9 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX



protection boards

Configurable as required.





Switching time ≤ 50 ms

7.1.9 Intelligent Fans

Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the temperature of theequipment.





233



The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation. The power

supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.

The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection.

When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the full speed. The

running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of thefan module.

7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection,

the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other

boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX

board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides

backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.

7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and

overvoltage protection.

Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is

interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are

not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed,

until the software is successfully and completely loaded.

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage

that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.

When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can

re-initialize the chip.

The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect

services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the

value can be restored to normal.

When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply

on the main loop so that the system is protected.

Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing

board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an

alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.

7.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.





234



7.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended

switching, and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.

The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N

(N≤ 14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 60 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection

scheme, extra traffic is supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time

of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, which is defined by ITU-T G.841.

NOTE

The N1FXCSA board can only works with the N4GSCC board.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 60 linear MSPs only when the N1FXCSA board works with

the N4GSCC board; in other cases, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs.

7.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings,

with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.

Table 7-10 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 7-10 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP

Rings Supported

STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring 2

STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring 4





The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features.

Adjustable MS Bandwidth

The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.

In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without

interrupting services. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from

1xVC-4 to 32xVC-4s.For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from

1xVC-4 to 8xVC-4s. For an STM-4 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from1xVC-4 to 2xVC-4s.





235



Upgradeable MS Bandwidth

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting

services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without

interrupting services.

Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process

two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one

optical interface.

MS Squelching

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.

On an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic.

When there is no extra traffic on the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated

from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result,

the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path,

the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra

traffic, even if only one point fails on the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.

To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list of

connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic

protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect the possibility of misconnection

in advance. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be

misconnected.

NOTE

The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol module

triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a line board, the

cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching status of the handshake

detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the squelching status with the relevant

information stored on the cross-connect board. If the squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the

cross-connect board issues a command to correct the MS squelching status.

7.2.3 SNCP

The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.

SNCPThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an

SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 7-1.





236



Figure 7-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail

NE1

NE4

NE3

NE2

NE5

NE8

NE7

NE6

The unprotected trail

NE1NE4

NE3

NE2

NE5

NE8

NE7

NE6

The working trail

Convert to an SNCP-protected trailConvert to an unprotected trail

The protction trail

The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 3500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.

If the FXCSA is used, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 16128 SNCP protection

pairs. If the IXCS is used, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP protection pairs. If any other cross-connect board is used, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of

2016 SNCP protection pairs.

In the trail management window of the NMS, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an

SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an

unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:

l Manual switching to protection path

l Manual switching to working path

l Forced switching to protection path

l Forced switching to working path

l Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting

l Revertive mode setting

NOTE

The OptiX OSN 3500supports the SNCP function between optical transmission links, between radio links,

and between optical transmission links and radio links. Radio links, however, support only lower order

SNCP protection groups.

SNCMP

The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)

protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protectionscheme.





237



The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP schemes.

In addition, it supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP protection groups.

The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection

is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink.

The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.

Figure 7-2 shows the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to

multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive based on the service priority

and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and

protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.

Figure 7-2 Principle of multipath protection

Source Sink

Working

Protection 1

Protection 2

Protection 3

Intermediatesubnetworks

A B

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 7-3, two protection paths protect a working path,

and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under

normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.

Figure 7-3 SNCMP networking

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

Microware

Radio

Microware

Radio

When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 7-4, NE3

receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.





238



Figure 7-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

Microware

Radio

Microware

Radio

When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty,

as shown in Figure 7-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.

Figure 7-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

Microware

Radio

Microware

Radio

SNCTP

The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all

its services can be switched to the protection path.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups.

The difference between the SNCTP and the SNCP is that the SNCTP checks the status of only

the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When

the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are generated, and then all services in

the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are generated, and the switching does not occur.





239



7.2.4 DNI

The dual node interconnection (DNI) network topology protection scheme effectively enhances

the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two

rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.

When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.

The DNI protection includes the conventional SDH DNI protection and data DNI protection.

Conventional SDH DNI Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection specified in ITU-T G.842.

The conventional DNI applies to the following topologies:

l Two SNCP rings

l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring

l Two MSP rings

Figure 7-6 shows the configuration of the DNI protection on two SNCP rings.





240



Figure 7-6 DNI protection on two SNCP rings

Adding/Dropping services

Line board

Tributary board

Workingchannel

Protectionchannel

SNCP ring 2

SNCP ring 1


NE A

NE B NE C

NE D

The inter-ring services can be protected when any of the following faults occurs:

l One fiber cut occurs on SNCP ring 1.


l One fiber cut occurs on SNCP ring 1 and one fiber cut occurs on SNCP ring 2.

l NE B (primary node) or NE C (secondary node) is faulty.

The primary node and the secondary node provide mutual protection. The inter-ring services are

not affected if either of the nodes becomes faulty.





241



Data DNI Protection

In the 3G mobile transmission networking, the backbone ring, convergence ring, and access ring

are generally included. The backbone ring is connected to the RNC, and the access ring is

connected to the 3G mobile base station. Due to a large number of 3G base stations, the

bandwidth utilization is low when services are converged to the backbone ring. Hence, the data

DNI protection uses the N4EGS4 or N1EGS2A board to converge the services at the intersection

point of the access ring and convergence ring, and then transmits the services to the backbone

ring. In this manner, the bandwidth utilization is improved efficiently.

Different from the conventional DNI protection, the data DNI protection uses the data board

N4EGS4 or N1EGS2A to terminate and regenerate 3G services for improving the bandwidth

utilization.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the data DNI protection.

The conventional DNI applies to the following topologies:

l Two SNCP rings

l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring

Figure 7-7 shows the configuration of the data DNI protection on two SNCP rings.





242



Figure 7-7 Data DNI protection on two SNCP rings

NE D


Line board

Tributary boardWorkingchannel

Protectionchannel

NE C


SNCP ring 2

SNCP ring 1

Data board

NE A

NE B

NOTE

Generally, the data DNI ring is composed of the access ring and convergence ring. The access ring can be

configured with the SNCP only. When the convergence ring is already configured with the MSP, the SNCP

is required for realizing the data DNI networking. In this case, the convergence ring is configured with the

MSP and SNCP.

The inter-ring services can be protected when any of the following faults occurs:



l One fiber cut occurs on SNCP ring 1 and one fiber cut occurs on SNCP ring 2.





243



l NE B (primary node) or NE C (secondary node) is faulty.

The primary node and secondary node provide mutual protection. The inter-ring services are not

affected if either of the nodes becomes faulty.

For details on the data DNI protection, see Data DNI Protection in the Feature Description.

7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even

STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.

These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case

of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection

can be set accordingly.

Figure 7-8 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

Figure 7-8 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

STM-16

SNCPSTM-16

MSP

STM-64

S T M - 6 4

7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple

MSP groups so that multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.

A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple

sets of independent K bytes. The N1SL64, N1SLD64, N4SLD64, N4SLO16, N4SL64, N4SF64,

N4SFD64, N1SF64, N2SL64, N1SLO16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16 boards of

the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths.

Table 7-11 Capability of the optical-path-shared MSP on the OptiX OSN 3500

Item STM-16 STM-64

Supported Boards SLO16, SF16 and SL16 SF64, SFD64, SL64 and

SLD64

Number of supported

MSP rings

A single optical interface supports a maximum of two MSP rings.





244



Item STM-16 STM-64

Supported K bytes Supports a maximum of two sets

of K bytes. The K bytes are located

in the first and fifth VC-4s.

Supports a maximum of two

sets of K bytes. The K bytes are

located in the first and

seventeenth VC-4s.

Figure 7-9 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX

OSN 3500.

Figure 7-9 Optical-path-shared MSP

STM-4/16

Optical-path-

shared MSP ring

STM-16/64

STM-4/16STM-4/16

STM-4/16STM-4/16

STM-4/16

Optical-path-

shared MSP ring

For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in

Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines

STM-16

STM-16

STM-64

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2

The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared protection

group in two directions, as shown in Figure 7-11. In this case, the west STM-16 line units canonly add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.





245



Figure 7-11 One line shared by two lines at the same rate

STM-16

STM-16

STM-16

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2

7.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.

Figure 7-12 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ringand the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the

inner ring carry the control information on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer

ring carry the control information on the inner ring.

The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added

to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only

perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the

ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared

with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among

nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every

single packet.

Figure 7-12 Example of bidirectional RPR

Node 1

Outer ring

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5

Inner ring

RPR

In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.

The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacentto the fiber cut point. See Figure 7-13.





246



Figure 7-13 RPR wrapping protection

Node 1

Outer ring

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5

Inner ring

RPR

Wapping

The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber

cut. See Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 RPR steering protection

Outer ring

Inner ring

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5

RPR

Steering

In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and

the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function

is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the

steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during

the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.

7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.





247



Figure 7-15 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-

Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any

physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.

Figure 7-15 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

NE1

NE2

NE4

NE3

Working path

ATM

service

Protection path

ATM

service

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs),

and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two

connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at

the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the

service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects

the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.

7.2.9 ERPS

Developed based on conventional Ethernet protection mechanism, Ethernet ring protection

switching (ERPS) uses the ring automatic protection switching (R-APS) technique to implement

fast protection switching on Ethernet rings.

Generally, when a ring network is configured with ERPS, the RPL owner node blocks its port

on one side so that all the services can be transmitted only through the ports on the other side.

In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a segment of links on the ring fails or an NE on

the ring becomes faulty, the RPL owner node unblocks its RPL port and thus the services thatcannot be transmitted over the faulty point can be transmitted through the RPL port. Therefore,

ring protection is provided.

The Ethernet ring network as shown in Figure 7-16 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the

RPL owner node (NE D) blocks its port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are

transmitted over the link NE A <-> NE B <->NE C <-> NE D. When the link between NE A

and NE B becomes faulty, NE D unblocks its port so that the services can be transmitted over

the link NE A <-> NE D <-> NE C <-> NE B.





248



Figure 7-16 ERPS

Protection switching

Link

NE B

NE A

NE C

NE D

NE B

NE A

NE C

NE D

Failure

Ethernet service direction

Blocked port





249



8 OAM

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions.

8.1 Alarm and Performance Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports alarm and performance management, which can help the network

administrator s locate and rectify faults quickly.

8.2 ALS Function And Optical Power Management

OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces

and provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH single-mode optical

interfaces.

8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment Maintenance

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple maintenance methods. Hence, the user can conveniently

monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault of the equipment.

8.4 Board Re placement and Equipment Upgrade

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a network upgrade through board replacement or software

upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.

8.5 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the transport network management system

(hereinafter referred to as the NMS) through the ETH port. The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH,

Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on the entire network.


Product Description 8 OAM



250



8.1 Alarm and Performance Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports alarm and performance management, which can help the network

administrators locate and rectify faults quickly.

l In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to request

the network administrators to take proper measures.

l The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four output

interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate

operation and maintenance of the equipment.

l Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators locate

and rectify faults quickly.

l Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1860, the NE

reports that excessive alarms are generated.

l Supports the alarm suppression function to facilitate the fault locating. On the NE where

the services from the line board to the tributary/data board are available, when the line

board reports certain higher order alarms, the lower order alarms on the tributary/data board

are suppressed. When no higher order alarms occur, the lower order alarms can be reported

to the NMS.

l The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm cutoff function. You can mute an alarm by

pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface.

l Supports setting the cross-connect resource threshold and the alarm reporting to facilitate

the monitoring of cross-connect resources. When the equipment is configured with the

higher order and lower order services, if the services exceed the threshold, the system

reports an alarm. When certain services are deleted and the services are equal or lower than

the threshold, the alarm is cleared.

l The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After

detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms.

l The working temperature of certain boards can be queried.

l The working temperature on certain boards can be queried and the performance events can

be reported.

l The voltage on certain boards can be queried and the performance events can be reported.

l When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a

performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator

focuses on the service state only.

l The remote monitoring (RMON) is supported for monitoring the data of transport networks

on different network segments, performing the network-wide error diagnosis, and receiving

the planning information and performance events.

l For 15-minute performance monitoring, the equipment can store sixteen 15-minute

historical performance data, namely, four hours of 15-minute historical performance. For

24-hour monitoring, the equipment can store six 24-hour historical performance data, that

is, six days of 24-hour historical performance.





251



8.2 ALS Function And Optical Power Management

OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical interfaces

and provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH single-mode optical

interfaces.

ALS Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH optical

interfaces.

l When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at

the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the

transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser

pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.

l After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the

laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite

end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by

the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams.

As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS

alarm is cleared.

The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function complies with ITU-T G.664.

Optical Power Management

l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH optical

interfaces.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical

module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode

(single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate, and wavelength.

l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-

mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which facilitates the

maintenance.

l The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.

8.3 Fault Locating and Equipment MaintenanceThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple maintenance methods. Hence, the user can conveniently

monitor and commission the equipment, and locate the fault of the equipment.

Fault Location

l Certain tributary board, line boards, and cross-connect boards support the PRBS function

and remote error test. The NE that provides the PRBS function can be used as a meter to

analyze whether the service channel is faulty. Hence, tests can be performed without any

meter in the deployment process or fault locating. For details on the PRBS, see STP and

RSTP in the Feature Description.

l

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This functionreduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user





252



is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel the collection according to

the requirement.

l The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities can be traced

to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities.

l The connectivity status of the services can be determined.

l The faulty node can be analyzed.

l The incorrect fiber connection can be detected to avoid the service interruption in the

incorrect MSP switching.

ETH-OAM

l The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2

maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployment

services, and locate network faults.

l ETH-OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag, Y.1731 and IEEE 802.3ah, and thus provides a

complete Ethernet OAM solution that realizes auto discovery of faults and fault locating.

l For details on the ETH-OAM, see STP and RSTP in the Feature Description.

Monitoring and Maintenance

l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel

at different sites to communicate with each other.

l The NMS can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of

each set of equipment on a network.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment

becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotelymaintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system.

l Certain line boards support the tandem connection monitor (TCM) function. When a VC-4

path travels through multiple networks, the TCM function can monitor the errors on each

section of the path. For details on the TCM, see STP and RSTP in the Feature

Description.

l The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After

being inserted, the board does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds

the power consumption threshold of the equipment.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the query of the current status of the NE, board, and port.

l The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted according to the

daylight saving time in the country.

l Certain data boards are capable of responding to the ping command. A ping command can

be issued on the base station side to test the connectivity of Ethernet paths when the

following three conditions are met: The equipment is interconnected with the base station;

the equipment is configured with the N4EGS4/N1EGS2A/N1EGSH board; the IP address

of the board is set.

8.4 Board Replacement and Equipment Upgrade

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports a network upgrade through board replacement or software

upgrade. The following part describes several key network upgrade methods.





253



8.4.1 Simulation Package Loading and Package Diffusion

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the functions of simulation package loading and simulation

package diffusion.

Simulation Package Loading

When you need to upload the whole set of the software to an NE, and the mapping between the

board and software is defined according to the format of the simulation software package, you

can use the simulation software package to improve the loading efficiency and upgrade security,

and reduce the operation complexity.

The simulation software package includes:

l All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE

l Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each software

The simulation software package loading has the following features:

l The user loads the software on an NE basis and through a uniform operation interface.

l The status of the NE does not affect the loading.

l A version rollback is supported for an upgrade failure.

Simulation Package Diffusion

When you use the simulation package simulation method, the simulation software package is

diffused and loaded to all NEs on a network. The diffusion protocol running on the NEs ensures

that the loading process is almost synchronous. As a result, package loading is more efficientand less manual operations are required.

Simulation package diffusion has the following features:

l Level-by-level package diffusion and synchronous package loading on multiple NEs

l Load sharing

l Balanced utilization of network bandwidths

8.4.2 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot patch technology.

Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new

requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with

new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any

service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.

The hot patch technology has the following features:

l The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting the services.

l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent

software version upgrade.

l

The hot patch operation and can be performed remotely. The hot patch also provides arollback function. This helps to prevent upgrade risks.





254



l The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the

problem-solving efficiency.

8.4.3 NSF

The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) is supported by the Ethernet boards on the OptiX

OSN 3500. When the control plane of the system fails to support the services (for example, the

CPU is reset), the function can guarantee the normal data service forwarding and protect key

services on the network.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the NSF function in the following cases:

l A warm reset is performed on the data board.

l A warm reset is performed on the cross-connect and timing board.

l A cold reset is performed on the cross-connect and timing board that is configured with 1

+1 protection.

l A reset is performed on the system control board that is configured with 1+1 protection.

NOTE

In NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software (excluding the FPGA and protocol) and NP software for

the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4 boards can be complete after a warm reset is performed on the board. If the

source version is much different from the target version in the upgrade, the upgrade can only greatly shortens

the duration of service interruption, but cannot guarantee the service interruption within 50 ms.

8.4.4 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board.

After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are

consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme.

If the NE houses a board that is of a later version and supports the board version replacement

function and the board of an earlier version is working, the board that supports the board version

replacement function can be upgraded from the earlier version to the later version on the NMS

in the case of the NE upgrade. When the board is upgraded from the earlier version to the later

version, the services are not interrupted transiently.

For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the Part

Replacement Design.

When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:

l The board of the later version may not support the functions of the original board. Before

the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example,

If the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be

replaced with the N1SL64 board.

l The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.

8.5 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the transport network management system

(hereinafter referred to as the NMS) through the ETH port. The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH,Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on the entire network.





255



The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T recommendations. The equipment adopts the

management information model and the object-oriented management technology. With the

NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the

communication module to manage the alarms and performance events in a centralized manner.

In addition, the end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be realized.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMPv2/SNMPv3),

which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.





256



9 Security Management

About This Chapter

The NMS uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN equipment NE.

9.1 AAA Management

The OptiX OSN product series provides a stable authentication authorization accounting (AAA)

mechanism that is used to perform authentication, authorization, and accounting for users.

9.2 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the NMS and NEs is the prerequisite for the NMS to effectively

manage the NEs.

9.3 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed

forcibly.

9.4 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions.


Product Description 9 Security Management



257



9.1 AAA Management

The OptiX OSN product series provides a stable authentication authorization accounting (AAA)mechanism that is used to perform authentication, authorization, and accounting for users.

9.1.1 AAA Management Mode

The OptiX OSN equipment supports two AAA management modes: local user management and

remote user management under the Remote Authentication Dial in User Service (RADIUS)

protocol.

Local Management

In actual network topology, some devices are located on the client side, and the client side is in

the insecure zone of the entire network. The local user management mechanism can manage the

user name, password, and authority on the client-side equipment in a unified manner.

The local user management function supports the addition, deletion, query, and attribute

modification of accounts.

Remote Management

Under the RADIUS protocol, the user needs to add the account and account-associated private

attributes on the AAA server. The RADIUS centralized authentication function needs to be

configured on the equipment. The centralized authentication mode is the C-S mode. C indicatesthe equipment on which the authentication is initialized, and S indicates the AAA server.

The remote user management mechanism provides the following functions:

l Supports disabling or enabling of RADIUS authentication. RADIUS authentication is

disabled by default.

l Supports the configuration of active and standby RADIUS servers. That is, the equipment

first attempts to request authentication from the active server. If the active server is not

available, the system automatically switches to the standby server. After the authentication

is passed, the user can log in to the NE successfully.

l Supports the combination of RADIUS remote authentication and local authentication. That

is, when the equipment fails to pass the RADIUS remote authentication, the system will

automatically switch to the local authentication. Then, when the local authentication fails,

the system will be disconnected from the user.

l Supports the configuration of public key.

l Supports two authentication and authorization modes: NAS and PROXY NAS. The

PROXY NAS function can be enabled or disabled.

l Supports the configuration of active and standby PROXY NASs.

l Supports the application on ECC, OSI, and IP over DCC networks.

l Supports the application on a network that consists of different versions of devices.

For details on RADIUS, see RADIUS in the Feature Description.





258



9.1.2 Authentication Management

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.

l NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user

name and a valid password.

l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For

this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to

be switched to ensure that the data is unique.

l Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous

configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the

NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE.

l NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than

that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.

l NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent

other users from operating the locked modules.

l Query the online NE users.

9.1.3 Authorization Management

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations

performed by each user and the security of the NE system.

l NE user management:

– According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which

involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and

debugging level in an ascending order.– Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.

– Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change

the user flag.

– Delete NE users.

l NE user group management:

– According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into

administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel

group, and maintenance personnel group.

– Modify the group of a user.

9.1.4 Accounting Management

In RADIUS management mode, the equipment supports the accounting management of logged-

in accounts, recording how the users use the network resources.

The accounting management includes the following items:

l Accounting request

l Accounting response

l Accounting stop

l Accounting retransmission





259



9.2 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the NMS and NEs is the prerequisite for the NMS to effectively

manage the NEs.

l The NMS communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol.

Therefore, the data is complete and safe.

l Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network,

and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is

divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.

– For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to

check the source address of the IP packets only.

– For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In

this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and

protocol type of the received IP packets.

– If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced

ACL rule to check the packets.

– Query the ACL rule.

– Modify the ACL rule.

– Delete the ACL rule.

l An NE allows the NMS to access it over the Ethernet network.

l When the NMS communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and

password) is encrypted.

9.3 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed

forcibly.

l Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.

l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm

after a user logs in to the NE.

l Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.

l Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.

l Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.

l Query or set the password uniqueness.

9.4 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions.

9.4.1 NE Security Log Management

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operationresults. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.





260



l Query the security logs of the NE.

l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.

9.4.2 Syslog Management

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For

unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log

server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports:

l Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol

l Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP

l Adding and deletion of Syslog servers

l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the

same time

l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and

the NE

Figure 9-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security

of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network.

Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers.

The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC

mode or IP over DCC mode.

Figure 9-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting

NMS

Syslog Server A

Syslog Server Breal time

security log

TCP/IP

NE A

(client)

NE B

NE C

(client)

NE D

ECC/ IP OVER DCC

NOTE

Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all

NEs in a network.

A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log

server. In Figure 9-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.

When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate

with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and

port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers

through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.

When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directlyconnect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be





261



transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC.

Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding

gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE

for NE D.





262



10 Technical Specifications

About This Chapter

The technical specifications provide the specifications of the optical interfaces, electrical

interfaces and environment.

10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment

The overall s pecifications of the equipment include the packet switching capability, TDM cross-

connect capa bility, specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power supply

parameters, laser safety class, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and environmental

specifications.

10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical InterfacesThis topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical

interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces,

Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information on

wavelength allocation.

10.3 Ethernet Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical

interfaces, and Ethernet electrical interfaces.

10.4 Microwave RF Performance

This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver

performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance of

the modem, and link reliability.

10.5 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232

interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.

10.6 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards

stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

related tests.

10.7 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications.

10.8 Environmental Conditions


Product Description 10 Technical Specifications



263



The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation, and

operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.

10.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board

This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series

equipment.





264



10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment

The overall specifications of the equipment include the packet switching capability, TDM cross-

connect capability, specifications of the cabinet, specifications of the subrack, power supply

parameters, laser safety class, electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and environmental

specifications.

10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, number of permitted

subracks, and PDU.

Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.

Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Number of PermittedSubracks

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (T63) 58 1

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) (N63E) 41 1

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) (N66T) 71 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) (T66) 80 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (T63) 63 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) (N63E) 45 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) (N66T) 76 4

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) (T66) 85 4

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) (T63) 73 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) (T66) 101 4

NOTEThe 600 mm ETSI cabinet can house non-high power subracks and enhanced subracks (1100 W) that

reside in back-to-back mode.

NOTE

Both the N63E cabinet and N66T cabinet are available in two heights, namely, 2000 mm and 2200 mm. If

the cabinet that is 2600 mm high is required, add an enclosure frame that is 400 mm high on a cabinet that

is 2200 mm high.

The DC power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top of a cabinet and is used to provide

power to the equipment. Table 10-2 lists the technical specifications of the PDU.





265



Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the PDU

Board Dimensions(mm)

Single-CabinetInput Voltage(V)

Single-CabinetOutput Voltage(V)

OutputCurrent (A)

N1PDU 530 (W) x 97 (D)

x 133 (H)

-48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x20 A

l 4x32 A-60 (DC) -48 to -72

TN51PDU 535 (W) x 147

(D) x 133 (H)

-48 (DC) -38.4 to -57.6 l 4x63 A

l 4x32 A-60 (DC) -48 to -72

NOTE

l Two power inputs that back up each other need to be provided, and they work in load-sharing mode.

l In the telecommunications room, it is required that the PDU needs to provide power supply for an

entire subrack. In this case, normal power supply can be guaranteed when either of the power inputs

fails.

NOTE

The number of subracks that a cabinet can house is determined by the subrack power consumption and the

number of PDU inputs/outputs.

l If there are two 32 A power supplies available in the telecommunications room, a cabinet houses a

maximum of one type-III subrack.

l If there are four 32 A or two 63 A power supplies available in the telecommunications room, a cabinet

houses a maximum of two type-III subracks, with each subrack consuming less than 1100 W power.

10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and maximum power

consumption.

Table 10-3 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

Table 10-3 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 23 (net weight of the subrack that is not

installed with boards or fans)

Table 10-4 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.





266



Table 10-4 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

SubrackType

MaximumConfiguration

Typical Configuration

MaximumPowerConsumption

FuseCapacity

Typical PowerConsumption


General

OptiX

OSN 3500

subrack

720 W 20 A 442 W l Two N1SLD64 (S-64.2b, LC)

boards

l Two N2SLQ4 (S-4.1, LC)

boards

l Two N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC)

boards

lTwo N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC) boards

l Four N1OU08 boards

l Two N2EGT2 boards

l Two N1SXCSA boards

l One N4GSCC board

l One N1AUX board

l Two N1PIU boards

Enhanced

OptiX

OSN 3500

subrack


boards


boards

l Four N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC)

boards

l Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC)

boards


l Two N4EGS4 boards


l One N4GSCC board

l One N1AUX board

l Two N1PIUA boards





267



SubrackType

MaximumConfiguration


MaximumPowerConsumption

FuseCapacity

Typical PowerConsumption


OptiX

OSN 3500

type-III

subrack


boards


boards

l Four N1SLQ16 (L-16.2, LC)

boards

l Two N1SLH1 (S-1.1, LC)

boards


l Two N4EGS4 boards


l One N4GSCC board

l One N1AUX board

l Two N1PIUB boards

NOTE

The default maximum power consumption of the equipment is 1100 W. If the maximum power

consumption of the equipment needs to reach 2300 W, set the maximum power consumption parameter

on the NMS.

When the cabinet is fully loaded, the maximum power consumption is the sum of the maximum power

consumption of all subracks and the maximum power consumption of other configuration.

In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.

Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the

formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).

Table 10-5 lists the predicted reliability specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.

Table 10-5 Equipment predicted reliability

SystemAvailability

Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) Mean Time Between Failures(MTBF)

0.9999971 1 hour 38.97 years

10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the equipment.

Table 10-6 lists the power supply parameters.





268



Table 10-6 Power supply parameters

Item Specification

Power supply mode DC power supply

Nominal voltage -48 V or -60 V

Voltage range -38.4 V to -57.6 V or -48 V to -72 V

Maximum current 18.75 A/28.7 Aa/60 A b

a: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack

(1100 W) is used.

b: This value indicates the maximum current of the equipment when the enhanced subrack

(2300 W) is used.

10.1.4 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceIEEE 1588v2Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.

Table 10-7 provides the timing and synchronization performance of the traditional clock.

Table 10-7 Timing and synchronization performance of the traditional clock

Performance DescriptionOutput jitter Complies with ITU-T G.813.

Output frequency in free-run mode Complies with ITU-T G.813.

Long-term phase variation in locked mode Complies with ITU-T G.813.

10.1.5 Transmission Performance

The TDM transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.

Table 10-8 lists the TDM transmission performance.

Table 10-8 TDM transmission performance

Performance Description

Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825

Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783

Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826





269



10.1.6 Protection PerformanceProtection Performance of PacketSwitching

The OptiX OSN equipment supports a variety of protection schemes. This topic describes the

performance parameters for each protection scheme.

Linear MSP

Table 10-9 lists the linear MSP parameters.

Table 10-9 Linear MSP parameters

ProtectionType

RevertiveMode

Switching Protocol

Switching Time

Default WTRTime

Switching Condition

1+1 single-ended

switching

Non-revertive

Notrequired

≤ 50 ms - Any of thefollowing

conditions

triggers the

switching:

l R_LOS

l R_LOF

l MS_AIS

l B2_EXC

l B2_SD

(optional)

l Forced

switching

l Manual

switching

l Exercise

switching

1+1 single-

ended

switching

Revertive Not

required

600s

1+1 dual-

ended

switching

Non-

revertive

APS

protocol

-

1+1 dual-

ended

switching

Revertive APS

protocol

600s

1:N (N≤14)

dual-ended

switching

Revertive APS

protocol

600s

MSP Ring

Table 10-10 lists the MSP ring parameters.





270



Table 10-10 MSP ring parameters

ProtectionType

Revertive Mode

Switching Mode Switching Time

Default WTRTime

Switching Condition

Two-fiber

bidirectional

MSP

Revertive l Forced switching

l Manual

switching

l Exercise

switching

≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the

following

conditions

triggers the

switching:

l R_LOS

l R_LOF

l MS_AIS

l B2_EXC

l B2_SD

l Forced

switching

l Manual

switching

l Exercise

switching

Two-fiber

unidirection

al MSP


l Manual

switching

l Exercise

switching

Four-fiber

bidirectional

MSP


- ring

l Manual

switching - ring

l Exercise

switching - ring

l Forced switching

- span

l Manual

switching - span

l Exercise

switching - span

SNCP

Table 10-11 lists the SNCP parameters.

Table 10-11 SNCP parameters

Protection Type

RevertiveMode

Switching Time

Default WTR Time

Switching Conditions

SNCP Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the following alarms

triggers the switching of VC-4 level

SNCP:

l R_LOS

l R_LOF

l R_LOC

l MS_AIS

l B2_EXC





271



Protection Type

RevertiveMode

Switching Time

Default WTR Time

Switching Conditions

Non-

revertive

- l AU_AIS

lAU_LOP

l B3_EXC (optional)

l B3_SD (optional)

l HP_UNEQ (optional)

l HP_TIM (optional)

Any of the following alarms

triggers the switching of VC-3 level

SNCP:

l TU_LOP

l TU_AIS

l B3_EXC (optional)l B3_SD (optional)

l MW_LOF (only when an IF

board functions as a line board)

l MW_LIM (only when an IF


Any of the following alarms

triggers the switching of VC-12

level SNCP:

l TU_LOP

l TU_AIS

l BIP_EXC (optional)

l BIP_SD (optional)

l MW_LOF (only when an IF


l MW_LIM (only when an IF


10.1.7 Timeslot Numbering

The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.

Table 10-12 and Table 10-13 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX OSN

3500.





272



When creating cross-connections, you can use either of the following two numbering schemes

for SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links:

l Sequential scheme

The sequential scheme is also called timeslot scheme. The numbering formula is as follows:

VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21

This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended in ITU-T G.707. By default, the OptiX

OSN equipment uses this type of numbering scheme.

l Interleaved scheme

The interleaved scheme is also called line scheme. The numbering formula is as follows:

VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + TU-12 number

The OptiX equipment uses the interleaved scheme if the OptiX equipment interconnects

with equipment that also uses the interleaved scheme or if the interleaved scheme is

specified for the OptiX equipment

Table 10-12 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (sequential)

TUG2(7-1)

TUG2(7-2)

TUG2(7-3)

TUG(7-4)

TUG(7-5)

TUG(7-6)

TUG(7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

0

1

1

1

2

1

3

1

4

1

5

1

6

1

7

1

8

1

9

2

0

2

1

TU-3 (3-2) 2

2

2

3

2

4

2

5

2

6

2

7

2

8

2

9

3

0

3

1

3

2

3

3

3

4

3

5

3

6

3

7

3

8

3

9

4

0

4

1

4

2

TU-3 (3-3) 4

3

4

4

4

5

4

6

4

7

4

8

4

9

5

0

5

1

5

2

5

3

5

4

5

5

5

6

5

7

5

8

5

9

6

0

6

1

6

2

6

3

Table 10-13 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (interleaved)

TUG2(7-1)

TUG2(7-2)

TUG2(7-3)

TUG2(7-4)

TUG2(7-5)

TUG2(7-6)

TUG2(7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 2

2

4

3

4 2

5

4

6

7 2

8

4

9

1

0

3

1

5

2

1

3

3

4

5

5

1

6

3

7

5

8

1

9

4

0

6

1

TU-3 (3-2) 2 2

3

4

4

5 2

6

4

7

8 2

9

5

0

1

1

3

2

5

3

1

4

3

5

5

6

1

7

3

8

5

9

2

0

4

1

6

2

TU-3 (3-3) 3 2

4

4

5

6 2

7

4

8

9 3

0

5

1

1

2

3

3

5

4

1

5

3

6

5

7

1

8

3

9

6

0

2

1

4

2

6

3

10.1.8 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.

Table 10-14 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.





273



Table 10-14 Laser safety class

LaserSafetyClass

Requirement forOptical Power

Board

Class 1 The maximum output

optical power of an

optical interface is

lower than 10 dBm (10

mW).

l SDH boards

l EoS boards

l EoP boards

l ATM boards

l RPR boards

l SAN/Video boards

l WDM boards: N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1FIB,

N1LWX

l Dispersion compensation boards: DCU

Class 4 The maximum output

optical power of an


higher than 27 dBm

(500 mW).

Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation

boards: N1RPC01, N1RPC02

Class

1M

The maximum output

optical power of an


between 10 dBm (10

mW) and 22.15 dBm

(164 mW).

l WDM boards: TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4,

TN11MR2, TN11MR4

l Optical power amplifier boards: N2BPA, N1BPA,

TN11OBU1, N1BA2, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA

10.1.9 Environmental Specification

The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.

The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table

10-15.

Table 10-15 Environment specifications for long-term operation

Specifications Description

Altitude ≤ 4850 m

Air pressure 55 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature 0 °C to 45 °C

Relative humidity 10% to 90%

Anti-seismic

performance

Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD





274



10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4 optical

interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored optical interfaces,

Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic also provides information on

wavelength allocation.

NOTE

To provide effective precaution, on the NMS, the lower threshold of the input optical power of the board

is set to higher than the receiver sensitivity and the higher threshold of the input optical power of the board

is set to lower than the overload optical power.

For SDH optical interfaces, the letters and numerals in the name are defined as follows:

l Letters: I: Internal; L: Long distance; S: Short distance; Ue, Le, Ls, Je, and Ve are Huawei-defined

interface standards.

l Numerals: The first numeral indicates the signal rate at the interface, whereas the second numeralindicates the optical fiber type.

l 1: G.652 optical fiber (operating wavelength: 1310 nm)

l 2: G.652 optical fiber (operating wavelength: 1550 nm)

l 3: G.655 optical fiber

CAUTION

The multi-mode optical interface operates at wavelength 850 nm, whereas the single-mode

optical interface operates at wavelength 1310 nm or 1550 nm. The optical interfaces of differentmodes cannot be interconnected.

The optical module type should match the optical fiber type. It is recommended that the single-

mode optical fiber uses the single-mode optical module, and the multi-mode optical fiber uses

the multi-mode optical module.

10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.

Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment.

Table 10-16 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Parameter Value

Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s

Line code type NRZ

Application code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

Transmission

distance (km)

0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 60 to 80 80 to 100





275



Parameter Value

Operating

wavelength range

(nm)

1260 to

1360

1270 to

1380

1261 to

1360

1263 to

1360

1480 to

1580

1480 to

1580

Type of fiber Single-

mode LC

Multi-

mode LC

Single-

mode

LC

Single-

mode LC

Single-

mode

LC

Single-

mode LC

Launched optical

power range (dBm)

-15 to -8 -20 to

-14

-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0

Receiver sensitivity

(dBm)

-23 -30 -28 -34 -34 -34

Minimum overload

(dBm)

-8 -14 -8 -10 -10 -10

Minimum extinction

ratio (dB)

8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10

Maximum -20 dB

spectral width (nm)

- - - - 1 1

Minimum side mode

suppression ratio

(dB)

- - - - 30 30




equipment.

Table 10-17 Parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment

Parameter Value


Line code type NRZ

Application code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Transmission distance (km) 0 to 2 2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100

Operating wavelength range

(nm)

1261 to

1360

1274 to

1356

1280 to

1335

1480 to

1580

1480 to

1580

Type of fiber Single-mode LC

Launched optical power

range (dBm)

-15 to -8 -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2





276



Parameter Value

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -23 -28 -28 -28 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8 -8 -13

Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)

8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5

Maximum -20 dB spectral

width (nm)

- - 1 1 1

Minimum side mode

suppression ratio (dB)

- - 30 30 30

10.2.3 STM-16 Optical InterfacesThis topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces.


equipment.


Parameter Value


Line code type NRZ

Application

code

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2Je V-16.2J

e (BA)

U-16.2Je

(BA

+PA)

Transmission

distance (km)

0 to 2 2 to 15 25 to 40 50 to

80

80 to 100 105 to

140

145 to

170

Operating

wavelength

range (nm)

1266

to

1360

1260 to

1360

1280 to

1335

1500 to

1580

1530 to

1560

1530 to

1565

1550.12


Launched

optical power

range (dBm)

-10 to

-3

-5 to 0 -2 to 3 -2 to 3 5 to 7 Without

the

booster

amplifie

r (BA):

-2 to 3

Without

the BA or

pre-

amplifier

(PA): -2

to 3

With the

BA: 13

to 15

With the

BA: 15 to

18





277



Parameter Value

Receiver

sensitivity

(dBm)

-18 -18 -27 -28 -28 -28 Without

the BA or

PA: -28

With the

PA: -34

Minimum

overload (dBm)

-3 0 -9 -9 -9 -9 Without

the BA or

PA: -9

With the

PA: -10

Dispersion

tolerance (ps/

nm)

12 - - 1200 to

1600

2000 2800 3400

Minimum

extinction ratio

(dB)

8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Maximum -20

dB spectral

width (nm)

- 1 1 1 1 1 1

Minimum side

mode

suppressionratio (dB)

- 30 30 30 30 30 30

Table 10-19 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX

OSN equipment.

Table 10-19 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment

Parameter Value Nominal bit rate 2666057 kbit/s

Line code type NRZ

Application code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f

Meaning of the code FEC + BA (14

dB) + PA

FEC + BA (17

dB) + PA

FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA

Operating wavelength range

(nm)

1550.12 1550.12 1550.12






278



Parameter Value


range (dBm)

Without the BA

or PA: -5 to -1

Without the BA

or PA: -5 to -1

Without the BA, RA,

or PA: -5 to -1

With the BA: 13to 15

With the BA: 15to 18

With the BA: 15 to 18

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Without the BA

or PA: -27.5

Without the BA

or PA: -27.5

Without the BA, RA,

or PA: -27.5

With the PA:

-37

With the PA:

-37

With the PA: -42

Minimum overload (dBm) -10 -10 -10


(dB)

10 10 10


width (nm)

1 1 1

Minimum side mode


30 30 30

NOTEThe numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "BA (14 dB)"

indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the

specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used.

"Minimum overload" is applicable to the PA.

"Minimum extinction ratio" is applicable to the optical module (not including the amplifier).




3500.


Parameter Value

Nominal bit

rate

9953280 kbit/s

Line code

type

NRZ

Application

code

I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2

b

L-64.2

b (BA)

P1L1-

2D2

Le-64.

2

Ls-64.

2

V-64.2b

(BA+PA

+DCU)





279



Parameter Value

Transmissio

n distance

(km)

0 to 2 0 to

25

2 to 40 35 to

80

40 to

80

35 to

60

55 to

80

80 to 120

Operating

wavelength

range (nm)

1290

to

1330

1530

to

1565

1530

to

1565

1530

to

1565

1530

to

1565

1530

to

1565

1530

to

1565

1550.12


Launched

optical

power range

(dBm)

-6 to

-1

-5 to

-1

-1 to 2 Witho

ut the

BA: -4

to 2

0 to 4 2 to 4 3 to 7 Without

the BA,

PA, or

DCU: -4

to -1

With

the

BA: 13

to 15

With the

BA: 13 to

15

Receiver

sensitivity

(dBm)

-11 -14 -14 -14 -24 -21 -21 Without

the BA,

PA, or

DCU: -14

With the

PA: -26

Minimum

overload

(dBm)

-1 -1 -1 -1 -7 -8 -8 -1

Dispersion

tolerance (ps/

nm)

6.6 500 800 1600 1600 1200 1600 2040

(with the

DCU)

Minimum

extinction

ratio (dB)

6 8.2 8.2 8.2 9 8.2 8.2 8.2

Maximum-20 dB

spectral

width (nm)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Minimum

side mode

suppression

ratio (dB)

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiXOSN 3500.





280



Table 10-21 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

3500

Parameter Value


Line code type NRZ/DRZ

NOTEOnly the line code of a SF64A board is DRZ.

Application code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e

Meaning of the

code

FEC + BA (14 dB) +

PA + DCU (60 + 80)

FEC + BA (17 dB) +

PA + DCU (80 x 2)

FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA + DCU (60

x 3)

Operating

wavelength range(nm)

1550.12 1550.12 1550.12


Launched optical

power range (dBm)

-4 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1

Receiver

sensitivity (dBm)

-14 -14 -14

Minimum overload

(dBm)

-1 -1 -1

Minimum

extinction ratio

(dB)

10 10 10

Dispersion

tolerance (ps/nm)

800 800 800

Maximum -20 dB

spectral width (nm)

1 1 1

Minimum side

mode suppression

ratio (dB)

30 30 30


indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that

the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, PA, Raman amplifier (RA), and BA

are used.

The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules (not including the amplifier and dispersion

compensation unit (DCU)).





281



10.2.5 Ethernet Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

3500.

The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply

with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX

OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical

interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 comply with IEEE 802.3u.

Table 10-22 lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces.

Table 10-22 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Parameter Value

Type of

interface

1000B

ASE-ZX

1000BA

SE-VX

1000BA

SE-LX

1000BA

SE-SX

100BA

SE-FX

100BA

SE-FX

10GBA

SE-SR (LAN)

10GBA

SE-SW

(WAN)

Transmissio

n distance

(km)

80 40 10 0.5 15 2 0.3

Type of fiber Single-

mode

LC

Single-

mode

LC

Single-

mode LC

Multi-

mode

LC

Single-

mode

LC

Multi-

mode

LC

Multi-

mode

LC

Launched

optical

power range

(dBm)

-2 to 5 -5 to 0 -9 to -3 -9.5 to

-2.5

-15 to -8 -19 to

-14

-1.3 to

-7.3

Operating

wavelength

range (nm)

1500 to

1580

1270 to

1355

1270 to

1355

770 to

860

1261 to

1360

1270 to

1380

840 to

860

Minimum

overload

(dBm)

-3 -3 -3 0 -8 -14 -1

Receiver

sensitivity

(dBm)

-23 -23 -20 -17 -28 -30 -7.5

Minimum

extinction

ratio (dB)

9 9 9 9 8.2 10 3

Maximum

-20 dB

spectral

width (nm)

1 1 - - - - 1





282



Parameter Value

Minimum

side mode

suppression

ratio (dB)

30 30 - - - - 30

10.2.6 ATM Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.

Table 10-23 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX

OSN 3500.

Table 10-24 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiXOSN 3500.

Table 10-23 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

3500

Parameter Value


Application code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

Transmission distance

(km)

0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100

Operating wavelength

range (nm)

1270 to

1380

1261 to

1360

1263 to

1360

1480 to

1580

1480 to

1580

Type of fiber Multi-

mode LC

Single-

mode LC

Single-

mode LC

Single-

mode LC

Single-

mode LC


range (dBm)

-20 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -3 to 0


(dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34 -34

Minimum overload

(dBm)

-14 -8 -10 -10 -10


(dB)

10 8.2 10 10 10


width (nm)

- - - 1 1

Minimum side mode


- - - 30 30





283



Table 10-24 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

3500

Parameter Value


Application code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Transmission distance

(km)

2 to 15 20 to 40 50 to 80 80 to 100

Operating wavelength

range (nm)

1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580



range (dBm)

-15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2


(dBm)

-28 -28 -28 -34

Minimum overload

(dBm)

-8 -8 -8 -13

Minimum extinction

ratio (dB)

8.2 10 10 10.5

Maximum -20 dB

spectral width (nm)

- 1 1 1

Minimum side modesuppression ratio (dB)

- 30 30 30

10.2.7 Tunable-Wavelength Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface.

Table 10-25 lists the specifications of the tunable-wavelength optical interface that complies

with ITU-T G.692.

Table 10-25 Parameters specified for the tunable-wavelength optical interface

Parameter Value


Line code type NRZ/DRZ

NOTEOnly the line code of a SF64A board is DRZ.

Application code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e





284



Parameter Value

Meaning of the

code

FEC + BA (14 dB) +

PA + DCU (60 + 80)

FEC + BA (17 dB) +

PA + DCU (80 x 2)

FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA + DCU (60

x 3)

Operating

wavelength range

(nm)

1550.12 1550.12 1550.12


Launched optical

power range (dBm)

-4 to -1 -4 to -1 -4 to -1

Receiver

sensitivity (dBm)

-14 -14 -14

Minimum overload(dBm)

-1 -1 -1

Minimum

extinction ratio

(dB)

10 10 10

Dispersion

tolerance (ps/nm)

800 800 800


indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that

the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the FEC, PA, Raman amplifier (RA), and BAare used.

The parameter values are applicable only to the optical modules (not including the amplifier and dispersion

compensation unit (DCU)).

10.2.8 Colored Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment.

With colored interfaces, the OptiX OSN equipment can directly be interconnected with theWDM equipment.

Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.





285



Table 10-26 DWDM parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment

Parameter Value

DWDM

Nominal bit

rate

9953280 kbit/s

(STM-64),

10709225 kbit/s

(FEC STM-64)

9953280 kbit/s

(STM-64) or

10709225 kbit/s

(FEC STM-64)

2488320 kbit/s

(STM-16)

2488320 kbit/s

(STM-16) or

2666057.143

kbit/s (FEC

STM-16)

Type of

fiber

Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC

Transmissi

on distance

(km)

40 (Pluggable) 40

(Unswappable)

170 640

Launched

optical

power

range

(dBm)

-1 to 2 -4 to -1 -2 to 3 -2 to 2.5

Central

frequency

(THz)

192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0

Central

frequency

deviation

(GHz)

±10 ±12.5 ±20 ±20

Receiver

sensitivity

(dBm)

-17 -14 -28 -28

Minimum

overload

(dBm)

-1 -1 -9 10

Maximumallowed

dispersion

(ps/nm)

800 800 3400 ±20

Minimum

extinction

ratio (dB)

9.5 10 8.2 35

Maximum

-20 dB

spectral

width (nm)

0.3 0.3 0.6 0.2





286



Parameter Value

DWDM

Minimum

side modesuppression

ratio (dB)

35 35 32 2

10.2.9 Wavelength Allocation

This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN equipment.

The optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment support the output of the wavelengths that

comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system.Table 10-27 provides the wavelength allocation information of CWDM optical interfaces.Table

10-28 provides the wavelength allocation information of DWDM optical interfaces.

Table 10-27 Wavelength allocation information of CWDM optical interfaces

No. Wavelength(nm)

Frequency (THz)

1 1611 186.2

2 1591 188.6

3 1571 191.0

4 1551 193.4

5 1531 196.0

6 1511 198.5

7 1491 201.2

8 1471 203.9

Table 10-28 Wavelength allocation information of DWDM optical interfaces

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength (nm)

1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53

2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73

3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94

4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14

5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35





287



No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength (nm)

6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56

7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77

8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98

9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19

10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40

11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61

12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82

13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04

14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25

15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47

16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68

17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90

18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12

19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33

20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55

10.3 Ethernet Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical

interfaces, and Ethernet electrical interfaces.

10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.

Table 10-29 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment.

Table 10-29 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces

Nominal bit rate 1544kbit/s

2048kbit/s

34368kbit/s

44736kbit/s

139264kbit/s

155520kbit/s

Line code pattern B8ZS

and AMI

HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI

Waveform at the output

interface

Complies with ITU-T G.703.





288



Nominal bit rate 1544kbit/s

2048kbit/s

34368kbit/s

44736kbit/s

139264kbit/s

155520kbit/s

Signal bit rate at the

output interface

Allowed attenuation at

the input interface

Allowed frequency

deviation at the input

interface

Complies with ITU-T G.823.

Input jitter tolerance Complies

with

ITU-T G.

824.

Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.823.

Compli

es with

ITU-T

G.823.

Compli

es with

ITU-T

G.824.

Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.823.

Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.825.

Anti-interference

capability at the input

interface

- Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.703.

Compli

es with

ITU-T

G.703.

- - -

Reflection attenuation at

the input/output

interface

- Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.703.

Compli

es with

ITU-T

G.703.

- Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.703.

Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.703.

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.

Mapping jitter Complies with ITU-T G.783. -

Combined jitter

Jitter transfer function - Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.742.

Compli

es with

ITU-T

G.751.

- Complie

s with

ITU-T

G.751.

-

10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.

Table 10-30 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.

Table 10-30 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces

Type ofInterface

Description Standard

Framed E1

interface

Framed E1 signal The physical and electrical characteristics of the

interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame

structure of the interface complies with ITU-T G.

704.





289



Type ofInterface

Description Standard

Nx64 kbit/s

interface

V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.

V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.

X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.

RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and

RS-422A).

RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530.

RS-530A

interface

Complies with EIA RS-530A.

10.3.3 Ethernet Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet electrical interfaces.

Table 10-31 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN

equipment.

Table 10-31 Parameters specified for electrical interfaces

Nominal Bit Rate Type of Interface Code Pattern

1000BASE-T RJ-45 4D-PAM5

100BASE-TX RJ-45 MLT-3

10BASE-TX RJ-45 MLT-3

10BASE-TX RJ-45 Manchester

10.4 Microwave RF Performance

This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity, transceiver

performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal processing performance of

the modem, and link reliability.

NOTE

This topic describes the specifications of the ODU. The OptiX OSN equipment does not support the

256QAM modulation scheme or the 56 MHz channel spacing.

10.4.1 Radio Work Modes

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH microwave frames.





290



Table 10-32 Radio work modes

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

STM-1 128QAM 28

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX

OSN equipment. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

10.4.2 IF Performance

The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M signals.

Table 10-33 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation scheme ASK

Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 10





291



10.4.3 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the performances of the

FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for baseband signals.

Table 10-34 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH signals

Adaptive time-

domain equalizer for

baseband signals

Support

10.4.4 Equipment Reliability

The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different link

reliabilities.

Table 10-35 Link reliability per hop

Item Performance

1+0 Non-protectionConfiguration

1+1 ProtectionConfiguration

MTBF (h) 12.03x104 51.6x104

MTTR (h) 1 1

Availability 99.99917% 99.99981%

10.4.5 SP ODUThe SP ODU is a type of the standard power ODU.

Modulation Mode

Table 10-36 Modulation Mode (SP ODU)

Item Performance

Modulation

mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM





292



Item Performance

Channel

Spacing

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Frequency Band

Table 10-37 Frequency Band (SP ODU)

FrequencyBand

Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)

7 GHz 7.093-7.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245

8 GHz 7.731-8.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32

11 GHz 10.675-11.745 490, 500, 530

13 GHz 12.751-13.248 266

15 GHz 14.403-15.348 315, 322, 420, 490, 728

18 GHz 17.685-19.710 1008, 1010, 1560

23 GHz 21.200-23.618 1008, 1200, 1232

26 GHz 24.549-26.453 1008

38 GHz 37.044-40,105 700, 1260

Transceiver Performance

Table 10-38 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/

32QAM

64QAM/

128QAM

256QAM

Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)

@7 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5

@8 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5

@11 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@13 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@15 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@18 GHz 25.5 21.5 17.5 15.5





293



Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/ 32QAM

64QAM/ 128QAM

256QAM

@23 GHz 24 20.5 16.5 14.5

@26 GHz 23.5 19.5 15.5 13.5

@38 GHz 22 17.5 13.5 11.5

Nominal

minimum

transmit power

(dBm)

-6

Nominal

maximum

receive power (dBm)

-20 -25

Frequency

stability (ppm)

±5

IF Performance

Table 10-39 IF Performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency

of the IF board (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of

the IF board (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency


5.5


the IF board (MHz)

10





294



Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 10-40 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (SP ODU)

Item Performance

Dimensions < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x height)

Typical Weight (kg) 4.6

Typical Power Consumption (W) 35

Frequency information

NOTE

Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center

frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus one

half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the maximum

frequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.

Table 10-41 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (SP ODU)

T/RSpacing (MHz)

Sub-band Lower Sub-band TxFrequency (MHz)

Higher Sub-band TxFrequency (MHz)

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

154 A 7,428.00 7,484.00 7,582.00 7,638.00

154 B 7,470.00 7,526.00 7,624.00 7,680.00

154 C 7,512.00 7,568.00 7,666.00 7,722.00

161 A 7,114.00 7,177.00 7,275.00 7,338.00

161 B 7,149.00 7,212.00 7,310.00 7,373.00

161 C 7,184.00 7,247.00 7,345.00 7,408.00

161 D 7,219.00 7,282.00 7,380.00 7,443.00

161 E 7,239.00 7,302.00 7,400.00 7,463.00

161 F 7,274.00 7,337.00 7,435.00 7,498.00

161 G 7,309.00 7,372.00 7,470.00 7,533.00

161 H 7,344.00 7,407.00 7,505.00 7,568.00

161 I 7,414.00 7,477.00 7,575.00 7,638.00

161 J 7,449.00 7,512.00 7,610.00 7,673.00

161 K 7,484.00 7,547.00 7,645.00 7,708.00





295



T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

161 L 7,519.00 7,582.00 7,680.00 7,743.00

161 M 7,539.00 7,602.00 7,700.00 7,763.00

161 N 7,574.00 7,637.00 7,735.00 7,798.00

161 O 7,609.00 7,672.00 7,770.00 7,833.00

161 P 7,644.00 7,707.00 7,805.00 7,868.00

168 A 7,443.00 7,499.00 7,611.00 7,667.00

168 B 7,485.00 7,541.00 7,653.00 7,709.00168 C 7,527.00 7,583.00 7,695.00 7,751.00

196 A 7,093.00 7,149.00 7,289.00 7,345.00

196 B 7,121.00 7,177.00 7,317.00 7,373.00

196 C 7,149.00 7,205.00 7,345.00 7,401.00

196 D 7,177.00 7,233.00 7,373.00 7,429.00

196 E 7,205.00 7,261.00 7,401.00 7,457.00

245 A 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,645.00 7,729.00

245 B 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,729.00 7,813.00

245 C 7,568.00 7,652.00 7,813.00 7,897.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

119/126 A 8,279.00 8,307.00 8,398.00 8,426.00

119/126 B 8,293.00 8,321.00 8,412.00 8,440.00

119/126 C 8,307.00 8,335.00 8,426.00 8,454.00

119/126 D 8,321.00 8,349.00 8,440.00 8,468.00

119/126 E 8,335.00 8,363.00 8,454.00 8,482.00

119/126 F 8,349.00 8,377.00 8,468.00 8,496.00





296



T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

266 A 7,905.00 8,024.00 8,171.00 8,290.00

266 B 8,017.00 8,136.00 8,283.00 8,402.00

311.32 A 7,731.00 7,867.00 8,042.00 8,178.00

311.32 B 7,835.00 7,971.00 8,146.00 8,282.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

490/500 A 10,700.00 10,890.00 11,200.00 11,390.00

490/500 B 10,855.00 11,045.00 11,355.00 11,545.00

490/500 C 11,010.00 11,200.00 11,510.00 11,700.00

530 A 10,675.00 10,855.00 11,205.00 11,385.00

530 B 10,795.00 10,975.00 11,325.00 11,505.00

530 C 10,915.00 11,135.00 11,445.00 11,665.00

530 D 11,035.00 11,215.00 11,565.00 11,745.00


T/RSpacing

(MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

266 A 12,751.00 12,814.00 13,017.00 13,080.00

266 B 12,807.00 12,870.00 13,073.00 13,136.00

266 C 12,863.00 12,926.00 13,129.00 13,192.00

266 D 12,919.00 12,982.00 13,185.00 13,248.00





297




T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

315/322 A 14,627.00 14,746.00 14,942.00 15,061.00

315/322 B 14,725.00 14,844.00 15,040.00 15,159.00

315/322 C 14,823.00 14,942.00 15,138.00 15,257.00

420 A 14,501.00 14,613.00 14,921.00 15,033.00

420 B 14,606.00 14,725.00 15,026.00 15,145.00

420 C 14,718.00 14,837.00 15,138.00 15,257.00

420 D 14,816.00 14,928.00 15,236.00 15,348.00

490 A 14,403.00 14,522.00 14,893.00 15,012.00

490 B 14,515.00 14,634.00 15,005.00 15,124.00

490 C 14,627.00 14,746.00 15,117.00 15,236.00

490 D 14,739.00 14,858.00 15,229.00 15,348.00

728 B 14,500.00 14,625.00 15,228.00 15,353.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1010/1008 A 17,685.00 17,985.00 18,695.00 18,995.00

1010/1008 B 17,930.00 18,230.00 18,940.00 19,240.00

1010/1008 C 18,180.00 18,480.00 19,190.00 19,490.00

1010/1008 D 18,400.00 18,700.00 19,410.00 19,710.00

1560 C 17,700.00 18,140.00 19,260.00 19,700.00





298




T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1,008 A 21,994.00 22,330.00 23,002.00 23,338.00

1,008 B 22,274.00 22,610.00 23,282.00 23,618.00

1,200 A 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,400.00 22,800.00

1,200 B 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,800.00 23,200.00

1,200 C 22,000.00 22,400.00 23,200.00 23,600.00

1,232 A 21,200.00 21,500.00 22,432.00 22,732.00

1,232 B 21,472.00 21,786.00 22,704.00 23,018.00

1,232 C 21,779.00 22,093.00 23,011.00 23,325.00

1,232 D 22,086.00 22,386.00 23,318.00 23,618.00


T/R

Spacing (MHz)

Sub-band Lower Sub-band Tx

Frequency (MHz)

Higher Sub-band Tx

Frequency (MHz)LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1008 A 24,549.00 24,885.00 25,557.00 25,893.00

1008 B 24,829.00 25,165.00 25,837.00 26,173.00

1008 C 25,109.00 25,445.00 26,117.00 26,453.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

700 A 38,595.00 38,805.00 39,295.00 39,505.00

700 B 38,795.00 39,005.00 39,495.00 39,705.00

700 C 38,995.00 39,205.00 39,695.00 39,905.00

700 D 39,195.00 39,405.00 39,895.00 40,105.00





299



T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1260 A 37,044.00 37,632.00 38,304.00 38,892.00

1260 B 37,604.00 38,192.00 38,864.00 39,452.00

10.4.6 HP ODU

The HP ODU is a type of the high power ODU.

Modulation Mode

Table 10-50 Modulation Mode (HP ODU)

Item Performance

Modulation

mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

Channel

Spacing

7/14/28/40/56MHz

Frequency Band

Table 10-51 Frequency band (HP ODU)

FrequencyBand

Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)

7 GHz 7.093-7.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245

8 GHz 7.731-8.497 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32

11 GHz 10.675-11.745 490, 500, 530

13 GHz 12.751-13.248 266

15 GHz 14.400-15.353 315, 322, 420, 490, 644, 728

18 GHz 17.685-19.710 1008, 1010, 1560

23 GHz 21.200-23.618 1008, 1200, 1232

26 GHz 24.549-26.453 1008

32 GHz 31.815-33.383 812

38 GHz 37.044-40.105 700, 1260





300



Transceiver Performance

Table 10-52 Transceiver performance (HP ODU)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/ 32QAM

64QAM/ 128QAM

256QAM

Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)

@7 GHz 30 28 25 23

@8 GHz 30 28 25 23

@11 GHz 28 26 22 20

@13 GHz 26 24 20 18

@15 GHz 26 24 20 18

@18 GHz 25.5 23 19 17

@23 GHz 25 23 19 17

@26 GHz 25 22 19 17

@32 GHz 23 21 17 15

@38 GHz 23 20 17 15

Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)

@7 GHz 9

@8 GHz 9

@11 GHz 6

@13 GHz 3

@15 GHz 3

@18 GHz 2

@23 GHz 2

@26 GHz 2

@32 GHz 1

@38 GHz 1

Nominal

maximum

receive power

(dBm)

-20 -25





301



Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/ 32QAM

64QAM/ 128QAM

256QAM

Frequencystability (ppm)

±5

IF Performance

Table 10-53 IF Performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequency


350


the IF board (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency


5.5


the IF board (MHz)

10

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 10-54 Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption (HP ODU)

Item Performance

Dimensions < 280 mm x 92 mm x 280 mm (width x depth x height)

Typical Weight (kg) 4.6

Typical Power Consumption (W) 40 (13/15/18/23/26/32/38GHz)

52 (7/8/11GHz)

Frequency information

NOTE

Frequency ranges shown are Tx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not the channel center

frequencies. The lowest available channel center frequency is at least the lowest frequency shown plus one

half of the selected channel spacing. The highest available channel center frequency is at most the maximumfrequency shown minus one half of the selected channel spacing.





302



Table 10-55 Frequency information of the 7 GHz frequency band (HP ODU)

T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

154 D 7,128.00 7,184.00 7,282.00 7,338.00

154 E 7,170.00 7,226.00 7,324.00 7,380.00

154 F 7,212.00 7,268.00 7,366.00 7,422.00

154 A 7,428.00 7,484.00 7,582.00 7,638.00

154 B 7,470.00 7,526.00 7,624.00 7,680.00

154 C 7,512.00 7,568.00 7,666.00 7,722.00

161 A 7,114.00 7,177.00 7,275.00 7,338.00

161 B 7,149.00 7,212.00 7,310.00 7,373.00

161 C 7,184.00 7,247.00 7,345.00 7,408.00

161 D 7,219.00 7,282.00 7,380.00 7,443.00

161 E 7,239.00 7,302.00 7,400.00 7,463.00

161 F 7,274.00 7,337.00 7,435.00 7,498.00

161 G 7,309.00 7,372.00 7,470.00 7,533.00

161 H 7,344.00 7,407.00 7,505.00 7,568.00

161 I 7,414.00 7,477.00 7,575.00 7,638.00

161 J 7,449.00 7,512.00 7,610.00 7,673.00

161 K 7,484.00 7,547.00 7,645.00 7,708.00

161 L 7,519.00 7,582.00 7,680.00 7,743.00

161 M 7,539.00 7,602.00 7,700.00 7,763.00

161 N 7,574.00 7,637.00 7,735.00 7,798.00

161 O 7,609.00 7,672.00 7,770.00 7,833.00

161 P 7,644.00 7,707.00 7,805.00 7,868.00

168 A 7,443.00 7,499.00 7,611.00 7,667.00

168 B 7,485.00 7,541.00 7,653.00 7,709.00

168 C 7,527.00 7,583.00 7,695.00 7,751.00

196 A 7,093.00 7,149.00 7,289.00 7,345.00

196 B 7,121.00 7,177.00 7,317.00 7,373.00





303



T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

196 C 7,149.00 7,205.00 7,345.00 7,401.00

196 D 7,177.00 7,233.00 7,373.00 7,429.00

196 E 7,205.00 7,261.00 7,401.00 7,457.00

245 A 7,400.00 7,484.00 7,645.00 7,729.00

245 B 7,484.00 7,568.00 7,729.00 7,813.00

245 C 7,568.00 7,652.00 7,813.00 7,897.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

119/126 A 8,279.00 8,307.00 8,398.00 8,426.00

119/126 B 8,293.00 8,321.00 8,412.00 8,440.00

119/126 C 8,307.00 8,335.00 8,426.00 8,454.00

119/126 D 8,321.00 8,349.00 8,440.00 8,468.00

119/126 E 8,335.00 8,363.00 8,454.00 8,482.00

119/126 F 8,349.00 8,377.00 8,468.00 8,496.00

151.614 A 8,203.00 8,271.00 8,355.00 8,423.00

151.614 B 8,240.00 8,308.00 8,392.00 8,460.00

151.614 C 8,277.00 8,345.00 8,429.00 8,497.00

208 A 8,043.00 8,113.00 8,251.00 8,321.00

208 B 8,099.00 8,169.00 8,307.00 8,377.00

208 C 8,155.00 8,225.00 8,363.00 8,433.00

208 D 8,211.00 8,281.00 8,419.00 8,489.00

266 A 7,905.00 8,024.00 8,171.00 8,290.00

266 B 8,017.00 8,136.00 8,283.00 8,402.00

311.32 A 7,731.00 7,867.00 8,042.00 8,178.00





304



T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

311.32 B 7,835.00 7,971.00 8,146.00 8,282.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

490/500 A 10,700.00 10,890.00 11,200.00 11,390.00

490/500 B 10,855.00 11,045.00 11,355.00 11,545.00

490/500 C 11,010.00 11,200.00 11,510.00 11,700.00

530 A 10,675.00 10,855.00 11,205.00 11,385.00

530 B 10,795.00 10,975.00 11,325.00 11,505.00

530 C 10,915.00 11,135.00 11,445.00 11,665.00

530 D 11,035.00 11,215.00 11,565.00 11,745.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

266 A 12,751.00 12,814.00 13,017.00 13,080.00

266 B 12,807.00 12,870.00 13,073.00 13,136.00

266 C 12,863.00 12,926.00 13,129.00 13,192.00

266 D 12,919.00 12,982.00 13,185.00 13,248.00





305




T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

315/322 A 14,627.00 14,746.00 14,942.00 15,061.00

315/322 B 14,725.00 14,844.00 15,040.00 15,159.00

315/322 C 14,823.00 14,942.00 15,138.00 15,257.00

420 A 14,501.00 14,613.00 14,921.00 15,033.00

420 B 14,606.00 14,725.00 15,026.00 15,145.00

420 C 14,718.00 14,837.00 15,138.00 15,257.00

420 D 14,816.00 14,928.00 15,236.00 15,348.00

490 A 14,403.00 14,522.00 14,893.00 15,012.00

490 B 14,515.00 14,634.00 15,005.00 15,124.00

490 C 14,627.00 14,746.00 15,117.00 15,236.00

490 D 14,739.00 14,858.00 15,229.00 15,348.00

644 A 14,400.00 14,512.00 15,044.00 15,156.00

644 B 14,498.00 14,610.00 15,142.00 15,254.00

644 C 14,596.00 14,708.00 15,240.00 15,352.00

728 A 14,500.00 14,615.00 15,228.00 15,343.00

728 B 14,500.00 14,625.00 15,228.00 15,353.00


T/R

Spacing (MHz)

Sub-band Lower Sub-band Tx

Frequency (MHz)

Higher Sub-band Tx

Frequency (MHz)LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1010/1008 A 17,685.00 17,985.00 18,695.00 18,995.00

1010/1008 B 17,930.00 18,230.00 18,940.00 19,240.00

1010/1008 C 18,180.00 18,480.00 19,190.00 19,490.00

1010/1008 D 18,400.00 18,700.00 19,410.00 19,710.00

1560 C 17,700.00 18,140.00 19,260.00 19,700.00





306




T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1008 A 21,994.00 22,330.00 23,002.00 23,338.00

1008 B 22,274.00 22,610.00 23,282.00 23,618.00

1200 A 21,200.00 21,600.00 22,400.00 22,800.00

1200 B 21,600.00 22,000.00 22,800.00 23,200.00

1200 C 22,000.00 22,400.00 23,200.00 23,600.00

1232 A 21,200.00 21,500.00 22,432.00 22,732.00

1232 B 21,472.00 21,786.00 22,704.00 23,018.00

1232 C 21,779.00 22,093.00 23,011.00 23,325.00

1232 D 22,086.00 22,386.00 23,318.00 23,618.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

1008 A 24,549.00 24,885.00 25,557.00 25,893.00

1008 B 24,829.00 25,165.00 25,837.00 26,173.00

1008 C 25,109.00 25,445.00 26,117.00 26,453.00


T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

812 A 31,815.00 32,207.00 32,627.00 33,019.00

812 B 32,179.00 32,571.00 32,991.00 33,383.00





307




T/RSpacing (MHz)



LowerLimit

UpperLimit

LowerLimit

UpperLimit

700 A 38,595.00 38,805.00 39,295.00 39,505.00

700 B 38,795.00 39,005.00 39,495.00 39,705.00

700 C 38,995.00 39,205.00 39,695.00 39,905.00

700 D 39,195.00 39,405.00 39,895.00 40,105.00

1260 A 37,044.00 37,632.00 38,304.00 38,892.00

1260 B 37,604.00 38,192.00 38,864.00 39,452.00

10.5 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces, RS-232

interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.

10.5.1 Clock Interface Specifications

The clock interface and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN equipment comply withrelated ITU-T recommendations.

Clock Interface Types

The OptiX OSN equipment provides the external clock input interface, external clock output

interface. as shown in Table 10-65.

Table 10-65 Description of the clock interfaces of the OptiX OSN equipment

Clock Type Description of Interface

External input clock l One channel of 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (in

compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048

kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703)

clock signals are input.

l One channel of 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (in



clock signals are input.





308



Clock Type Description of Interface

External output clock l One channel of 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (in



clock signals are output.

l One channel of 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (in



clock signals are output.

Timing and Synchronization Performance

As shown in Table 10-66, the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN

equipment complies with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823.

Table 10-66 Timing and synchronization performance

Parameter Value

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.

823.Output frequency of the internal oscillator in

free-run mode

Long-term phase variation (in locked mode)

10.5.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications

The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.

The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 10-67.

Table 10-67 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface


Bit rate 64 kbit/s

Timing signals From RX

Coding style Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Compliant Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Output interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703

Incoming interface characteristics Compliant with ITU-T G.703





309



10.5.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications

The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.

The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 10-68.

Table 10-68 Specifications of the RS-232 interface


Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s

Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only

Electrical levels ±5V-±15V

10.5.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications

The specifications of the RS-422 interface comply with EIA RS-422.

The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 10-69.

Table 10-69 Specifications of the RS-422 interface


Bit rate ≤19.2 kbit/s

Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only

Electrical levels ±2.0V

10.5.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications

The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.

The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 10-70.

Table 10-70 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface


Speech channel interface

Impedance 600 ohms

Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz

Operating current 18 mA

Input gain -4/0/0 dB





310




Output gain 0/-7/0 dB

Signalling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23

Analog EOW extension

Impedance 600 ohms

Bandwidth 300 Hz-3400 Hz

Tx level -3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr

Rx level -3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr

10.6 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThe OptiX OSN equipment is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards

stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

related tests.

Table 10-71 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.

Table 10-71 EMC test results

Item Standard

Radiated emission CISPR22 ClassAEN55022 Class A

Conducted emission for DC ports CISPR22 Class A

EN55022 Class A

Conducted emission for signal

ports

CISPR22 Class A

EN55022 Class A

Immunity to radiated

electromagnetic field

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz-2700 MHz: 10 V/m)

Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: ±8 kV; contact

discharge: ±6 kV)

Immunity to electrical fast transient

bursts for DC ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)

Immunity to electrical fast transient

bursts for signal ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2

IEC 61000-4-4 (±1 kV)





311



Item Standard

Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: ±1 kV, line to

ground: ±2 kV)

Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5 (±1 kV)

Immunity to continuous conducted

interference for DC ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)

Immunity to continuous conducted

interference for signal ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)

Immunity to continuous voltage

dips and short interruption andvoltage variation for DC power

port

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-29

10.7 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications.

Table 10-72 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received.

Table 10-72 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received

Item Standard

EMC CISPR22 Class A

CISPR24

EN55022 Class A

EN50024

ETSI EN 300 386 Class A

ETSI ES 201 468

CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class AICES 003 Class A

AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A

GB9254 Class A

VCCI Class A





312



Item Standard

Safety IEC 60950-1

IEC/EN41003

EN 60950-1

UL 60950-1

CSA C22.2 No 60950-1

AS/NZS 60950-1

BS EN 60950-1

IS 13252

GB4943

Laser safety FDA rules

21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11

IEC60825-1

IEC60825-2

EN60825-1

EN60825-2

GB7247

Health ICNIRP Guideline

1999-519-EC

EN 50385

OET Bulletin 65IEEE Std C95.1

Environment protection RoHS

10.8 Environmental Conditions

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation, and

operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.

The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the environmentalconditions:

l ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-

controlled location

l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

Physical Protection

10.8.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN equipment requires a proper environment for storage.





313



Climatic Conditions

Table 10-73 lists the climatic conditions for storage.

Table 10-73 Climatic conditions for storage

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4850 m


Air temperature -40°C to +70°C

Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1 °C/min


Waterproof Requirements

Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors.

There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The equipment

should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage such as near

the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.

If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:

lThe cartons must be intact.

l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.

l There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed.

l The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.

Biological Conditions

l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.

l Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive

dust.

l The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements specified in

Table 10-74.

Table 10-74 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during storage

Mechanically Active Substance Content

Dust (suspension) ≤ 5.00 mg/m3

Dust (sedimentation) ≤ 20.0 mg/m2 h





314




Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3

l The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements specified in

Table 10-75.

Table 10-75 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during storage

Chemically Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 10-76 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.

Table 10-76 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage

Item Sub-Item Range

Random vibration Acceleration spectral

density

- 0.02 m2/s3 -

Frequency 5 Hz to 20 Hz 10 Hz to 50

Hz

50 Hz to 100

Hz

dB/oct +12 - -12

10.8.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for transportation.





315



Climatic Conditions

Table 10-77 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.

Table 10-77 Climatic conditions for transportation

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4850 m


Air temperature -40°C to +70°C

Rate of change of temperature ≤ 1°C/min


Waterproof Requirements

Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:

l The cartons must be intact.

l Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.

l There should be no water in the transportation tool.

Biological Conditionsl Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.


Air Cleanness

l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive

dust.


Table 10-78.

Table 10-78 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during

transportation


Dust (suspension) No requirement


Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3





316




Table 10-79.

Table 10-79 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during

transportation

Chemically Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3

Cl2 -

HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 10-80 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation.

Table 10-80 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation

Item Sub-Item Range

Random vibration Acceleration spectral

density1 m2/s3 -3 dBA

Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz

Shock Response spectrum I

(sample weight > 50 kg)100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each

surface

Response spectrum II

(sample weight ≤ 50 kg) 180 m/s

2

, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface

Fall-off Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 10

1.0

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 15

1.0

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 20

0.8





317



Item Sub-Item Range

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 30

0.6

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 40

0.5

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 50

0.4

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

< 100

0.3

Weight (kg)

Height (m)

> 100

0.1

NOTEThe shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment

that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the

package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.8.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for operation.

Climatic Conditions

Table 10-81 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 3500 operates.

Table 10-81 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

Long-term

working

conditions

Short-term working

conditions

Long-term working

conditions

Short-term working

conditions

0°C to 45°C -5°C to +55°C 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

NOTEThe temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front

of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working time of the equipment

does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Biological Conditions

l Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.






318



Air Cleanness

l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or corrosive

dust.


Table 10-82.

Table 10-82 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during

operation

Mechanically ActiveSubstance

Content

Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3

Dust (suspension) ≤ 0.2 mg/m3


Sand ≤ 20 mg/m3


Table 10-83.

Table 10-83 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during operation

Chemically Active

Substance

Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 10-84 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation.





319



Table 10-84 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Range

Sinusoidal

vibration

Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -

Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Shock Shock response

spectrum IIHalf-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on

each surface

Static load 0 kPa

NOTEThe shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment

that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the

package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.

10.9 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board

This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX OSN series

equipment.

Table 10-85 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.

Table 10-85 Power consumption and weight of each board

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

SDH boards

N1SLQ41 12 0.6 N1SLD4 17 0.6

N1SF64A 33(the OptiX

OSN 3500/3500

II supports)

26(the OptiXOSN 7500

supports)

1.1 N2SLD4 15 1.0

N1SF64 33(the OptiX

OSN 3500/3500

II/2500 REG

supports)

26(the OptiX

OSN 7500

supports)

1.1 R1SLD4 11 0.5

N1SL64A 40 1.1 N1SL4A 17 0.6





320




Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

N1SL64 30(the OptiX

OSN 3500/3500

II/2500 REG

supports)

22(the OptiX

OSN 7500

supports)

1.1 N1SL4 17 0.6

N2SL64 32 1.1 N2SL4 15 1.0

T2SL64 40 1.1 R1SL4 10 0.5

N1SF16 26 1.1 R3SL4 11 0.5

N1SLO16 38 1.0 N1SEP1 17 1.0

N1SLQ16 20 0.9 N1SLH1 27 1.0

N2SLQ16 35 1.3 N1SLT1 22 1.3

N1SLD16 23 0.9 N2SLO1 26 1.1

N1SL16A 20 0.6 N3SLO1 20 1.2

N2SL16A 20 1.1 N1SLQ1A 15 1.0

N3SL16A 22 0.9 N1SLQ1 15 1.0

N1SL16 19 1.1 N2SLQ1 15 1.0

N2SL16 19 1.1 R1SLQ1 12 0.4

N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SL1A 17 0.6

N1SLQ4A 17 1.0 N1SL1 17 0.6

N1SLQ4 17 1.0 N2SL1 14 1.0

N2SLQ4 16 1.0 R1SL1 10 0.3

N1SLD4A 17 0.6 R3SL1 11 0.3

T2SL64A 40 1.1 N3SLQ41 16 0.7

N1EU08 11 0.4 N1EU04 6 0.4

N1OU08 6 0.4 N2OU08 6 0.4

N4SLD64 20 1.2 N4SFD64 37 1.1





321




Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

N4SLO16 21 1.0 N4SL64 15(the OptiX

OSN 3500/3500

II supports)

14(the OptiX

OSN 7500

supports)

1.1

N4SLQ16 12 0.7 N4SF64 26(the OptiX

OSN 3500/3500

II supports)

25(the OptiX

OSN 7500

supports)

1.2

N3SLH41 49 1.5 N1SLD64 41 1.2

R3SL1 11 0.2 R3SL4 11 0.6

PDH boards

N1SPQ4 24 0.9 N2PL3 12 0.9

N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PQM 22 1.0

N1DXA 10 0.8 N1PQ1 19 1.0

N1DX1 15 1.0 N2PQ1 13 1.0

N1PQ3 13 0.9 R1PD1 15 0.6

N1PD3 19 1.1 R2PD1 15 0.6

N2PD3 12 1.1 R3PD1 8 0.4

N1PL3A 15 1.0 N1PL1 7 0.5

N2PL3A 12 0.9 R1PL1 7 0.5

N1PL3 15 1.0 N2PQ3 13 0.9

N1DM12 0 0.4 N1TSB8 0 0.3

N1TSB4 3 0.3 N1MU04 2 0.4

N1C34S 0 0.3 R1L12S 5 0.3

N1D34S 0 0.4 N1D12B 0 0.3

N1D75S 0 0.4 N1L75S 3 0.3

N1D12S 0 0.4 - - -

Data boards

N1MST4 26 0.9 N2EFS4 30 1.0





322




Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

N1IDQ1 41 1.0 N3EFS4 18 0.6

N1IDL4 41 1.0 N1EFS0A 32 0.7

N1ADQ1 41 1.0 N1EFS0 35 1.0

N1ADL4 41 0.9 N2EFS0 35 1.0

N1EAS2 70 1.2 N4EFS0 35 1.0

N1EMR0 47 1.2 N5EFS0 22 0.6

N2EGR2 40 1.1 N1EGT2 29 0.9

N1EGS4A 53 1.1 N2EGT2 15 0.9 N1EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFT8A 26 1.0

N3EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFT8 26 1.0

N4EGS4 34 0.7 N1EFT4 14 0.5

N1EMS4 65 1.1 N1EFT8 26 1.0

N1EMS2 40 0.8 N1EFT4 14 0.5

N2EGS2 43 1.0 R1EFT4 14 0.5

N3EGS2 25 0.6 N2EMR0 50 1.2

N1EFS4 30 1.0 N1ETF8A 11 0.4

N1ETS8 0 0.4 N1EFF8A 15 0.4

N1EFP0 22 0.6 N2EFT8A 26 1.0

N1EGSH 82 1.2 N2EFT8 26 1.0

N1EFF8 6 0.4 N1ETF8 2 0.4

N3EAS2 Room

temperature (25°

C): 83

High temperature

(55°C): 93

1.1 N1IDL4A 46 1.5

Microwave boards

N1IFSD1 24 1.1 N1RPWR 45 1.4

WDM boards

N1FIB 0 0.4 N1MR2B 0 1.0

N1MR2A 0 1.0 N1MR2 0 0.9





323




Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

N1LWX 30 1.1 N1CMR4 0 0.9

N1MR4 0 0.9 N1CMR2 0 0.8

N1MR2C 0 1.0 - - -

Cross-Connect and system control boards

N1CRG 12 0.9 T1EXCSA 53 1.9

N1XCE 25 1.5 N1EXCSA 62 2.0

N1IXCSB 94 0.8 T1GXCSA 41 1.8

T1IXCSA 140 2.4 N1GXCSA 27 1.8 N1IXCSA 94 2.1 R1CXLQ4

1

48 1.0

N1SXCSB 63 1.8 Q6CXLQ4

1

48 1.5

T1SXCSA 96 2.2 R1CXLD4

1

48 1.0

N1SXCSA 63 2.0 R1CXLLN 48 1.0

N1UXCSB 65 2.0 Q6CXLLN 48 1.5

T1UXCSA

T2UXCSA

69 2.1 Q2CXL16 40 1.1

N1UXCSA 65 2.0 Q3CXL16 46 1.2

Q2CXL1 40 1.1 Q2CXL4 40 1.1

Q3CXL1 46 1.1 Q3CXL4 46 1.2

R2CXLLN

R2CXLQ4

1

28 1.0 Q5CXLLN

Q5CXLQ4

1

32 1.0

N2PSXCS

A

80 1.2 - - -

N1GSCC 10 0.9 N2GSCC 20 0.9

N3GSCC 20 0.9 N1FXCSA 107 1.6

T1PSXCS

A

95 1.4 N4GSCC 19 1.0

Auxiliary boards

N1FANA 19 1.2 R1AMU 8 0.5





324




Weight(kg)


Weight(kg)

XE1FAN 16 1.5 R1AUX 19 1.0

XE3FAN 10 1.2 R2AUX 19 1.0

R1FAN 20 0.8 Q1AUX 10 0.5

Q1SEI 10 0.9 N1AUX 19 1.0

N1SEI 1 0.9 T1AUX 3 0.4

Q1SAP 20 0.7 T1EOW 13 0.5

Q2SAP 25 1.0 R1EOW 10 0.4

Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards

N1DCU 0 0.4 62COA 75 8.0

N2DCU 0 0.4 N1COA 10 3.5

N1RPC02 110 4.2 N1BPA 20 1.0

N1RPC01 70 4.0 N2BPA 11 1.2

61COA 10 3.5 N1BA2 20 1.0

TN11OBU

101

16 1.3 TN11OBU

102

18 1.3

Power interface boards

R1PIUA 2 0.5 N1PIU 8 1.2

R1PIUB 4 0.4 Q2PIU 2 0.3

R1PIUC 5 0.5 Q1PIU 8 1.3

N1PIUA 3 0.5 R1PIU 2 0.4

T1PIU 8 1.3 UPM - 15

N1PIUB 6 0.6 T1PIUB 6 0.5





325



11 Energy Saving and Environment

Protection

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/CE) and WEEE directive

(2002/96/CE).

11.1 Energy Saving

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.

11.2 Environment Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the requirements of sustainable development.

All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance with the associated

standards for recycling.


Product Description 11 Energy Saving and Environment Protection



326



11.1 Energy Saving

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy saving.

Static Energy Saving

Regarding static energy saving, the OptiX OSN 3500 takes the following measures:

l Uses an easy scheme for board design.

l Replaces the ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require a low power consumption.

l Uses the power module with high efficiency.

l Replaces the linear power supplies with switching power supplies.

l Uses the standard digital voltage.

l Provides a power switch for each subrack. Thus, the power supply for the subrack can be

shut down the manually.

Dynamic Energy Saving

Energy saving (power down) design for boards:

l Idle buses are powered down. That is, the buses that are not configured with services and

the buses of the idle slots are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed.

l Idle optical ports are powered down. That is, idle optical ports of the line boards or data

boards are in power down state. In this manner, no power is consumed.

Heat dissipation design: The OptiX NG-SDH provides auto speed mode of fan speed adjustment.

In auto speed mode, the speeds of the fans in different partitions are adjusted separately and

steplessly according to the board temperatures of the partitions. The speed of the fans in the low-

temperature partition is automatically adjusted to a low level for energy saving. For details about

the fan speed adjustment scheme, see the Hardware Description.

Control and Monitoring of Energy Saving

You can control and monitor the energy saving through the NMS.

You can query the logical power consumption (W) of an NE, physical power consumption (W)of an NE, logical power consumption (W) of a board, and physical power consumption (W) of

a board on a real-time basis.

11.2 Environment Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed according to the requirements of sustainable development.

All components and packages of the equipment are identified in compliance with the associated

standards for recycling.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 not only provides necessary packing materials, but also guarantees

that the size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three timesthe size of the net equipment.





327



l The product is also designed for easy unpacking. For details about how to unpack the

equipment, see the associated manual. In addition, all hazardous substances contained in

packaging decompose easily.

l Every plastic component that weighs over 25g is labeled according to the standards of ISO

11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling.

l Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by

using simple tools.

l All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain identification

information, such as silkscreens, is printed on the front panel or subrack.





328



12 Compliant Standards

About This Chapter

This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 complies with.

12.1 ITU-T Recommendations

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.

12.2 IEEE Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IEEE standards.

12.3 IETF Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IETF standards.

12.4 ANSI Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ANSI related standards.

12.5 Environment Related Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the environment related standards.

12.6 EMC Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the EMC related standards.

12.7 Safety Compliance Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.

12.8 Protection Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the protection related standards.

12.9 ASON Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ASON related standards.

12.10 Microwave Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the microwave related standards.


Product Description 12 Compliant Standards



329



12.1 ITU-T Recommendations

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.

Table 12-1 ITU-T recommendations

Recommendation Description

G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport

systems

G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable

G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

optical fiber and cable

G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of

optical fiber amplifiers

G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-

systems

G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and

sub-systems

G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems

G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDHsystems with optical amplifiers

G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers

G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid

G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid

G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates

G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces

G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and

44736kbit/s hierarchical levels

G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)

G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check(CRC) procedures

relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.

704

G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy

(SDH)

G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)





330




G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems

G.774 1, G.774 2, G.7743, G.774 4, G.774 5

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management informationmodel for the network element view

G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) unidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view

G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) management of lower order

path trace and interface labeling for the network element view

G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view

G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH) configuration of linear

multiplex section protection for the network element view

G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect

detection and clearance criteria

G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements

G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)

networks and equipment

G.781 Synchronization layer functions

G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks

G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management

G.801 Digital transmission models

G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks

G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology

and generic functionality

G.808.1 Generic protection switching - Linear trail and subnetwork protection

G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks

G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks

G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node

clocks in synchronization networks

G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)





331




G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating

at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated

services digital network

G.822 Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital

connection

G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are

based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy


based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy


based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate

G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths

G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator

sections

G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures

G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures

G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy

G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy

for use on optical fiber cables

I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN

I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics

I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects

I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions

I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification

I.630 ATM protection switching

M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network

Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface

Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface





332




V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal

equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)

V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHzgroup band circuits

V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current

interchange circuits

X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series

modems

X.85 Link Access Procedure-SDH (LAPS)

X.86 Ethernet over LAPS

12.2 IEEE Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IEEE standards.

Table 12-2 IEEE standards

Standard Description

IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications

IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider bridges

IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management

IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges

IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks

IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Trees

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree

IEEE 802.1v VLAN Classification by Protocol and Port

IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)

access method and physical layer specification

IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments

IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and

management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation

IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)

access method and physical layer specifications





333




IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium

attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100BASE-

T

IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for

802.3 full duplex operation

IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater and

management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

12.3 IETF Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the IETF standards.

Table 12-3 IETF standards


RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH

RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing

RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)

RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-

IDENTITIES for ATM management

RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture

RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding

12.4 ANSI Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ANSI related standards.

Table 12-4 ANSI related standards


ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON

ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)





334



12.5 Environment Related Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the environment related standards.

Table 12-5 Environment related standards


IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures

IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart

3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments

IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake

vibration

IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1:

Storage

IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3:

Stationary use at weatherprotected locations

ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations

ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location

ETS 300 119 Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunicationsstandard for equipment practice

ETS 300 417 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment

ETS 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment

EN 300 132 Equipment Engineering (EE); Power supply interface at the input to

telecommunications equipment

NEBS GR-63-CORE Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:

Physical protection

12.6 EMC Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the EMC related standards.

Table 12-6 EMC related standards


IEC 61000-4-2

EN 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement

techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test





335




IEC 61000-4-3

EN 61000-4-3

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and

measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,

electromagnetic field immunity test

IEC 61000-4-4

EN 61000-4-4


measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity

test

IEC 61000-4-5

EN 61000-4-5


measurement techniques-Surge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-6

EN 61000-4-6


measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,

induced by radio-frequency fields

IEC 61000-4-29EN 61000-4-29

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and

voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests

CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement

CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity characteristics-

limits and methods of measurement

ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;

ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements

ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM);

Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunica-

tions equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific

applications

ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications

equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)

12.7 Safety Compliance StandardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.

Table 12-7 Safety compliance related standards


EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety

IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment





336




CAN/CSA-C22.2 No

1-M94

Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No950-95

Safety of information technology equipment

73/23/EEC Low voltage directive

UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment

IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety

EG 201 212 Electrical safety; Classification of interfaces for equipment to be

connected to telecommunication networks

ITU-T G.644 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport

systems

12.8 Protection Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the protection related standards.

Table 12-8 Protection related standards


IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning

IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general

principles

IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and

measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test

ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents

ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to

overvoltages and overcurrents

ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication

building

ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to

surge overvoltages

12.9 ASON Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the ASON related standards.





337



Table 12-9 ASON related standards


G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN)

G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON)

G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network

G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI

G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks

G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols

G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery

G.7717 Connection admission control

G.7718 Framework for ASON management

RFC 3471

(GMPLS)

Signaling functional description

12.10 Microwave Standards

The OptiX OSN 3500 complies with the microwave related standards.

Table 12-10 Microwave related standards


ITU-R F.384-7 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity

analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz

band

ITU-R F.383-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay

systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band

ITU-R F.385-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems

operating in the 7 GHz band

ITU-R F.386-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity

analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHz band

ITU-R F.387-9 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems



operating in the 13 GHz frequency band







338




ITU-R F.595-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless systems

operating in the 18 GHz frequency band

ITU-R F.637-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systemsoperating in the 23 GHz band


operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands

ITU-R F.749-2 Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service operating

in the 38 GHz band

ITU-R F.1191-1 1 Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay systems

ITU-R SM.

329-10

Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain

ETSI EN 302

217-1 V1.1.4

Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-

point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and system-

independent common characteristics

ETSI EN 302

217-2-1 V1.1.3


point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1: System-dependent requirements

for digital systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-

ordination is applied

ETSI EN 302

217-2-2 V1.1.3

Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-

point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN covering

essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital

systems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is

applied

ETSI EN 302

217-3 V1.1.3

Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements forpoint-to-

point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN covering

essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for equipment

operating in frequency bands where no frequency co-ordination is

applied

ETSI EN 302

217-4-1 V1.1.3


point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1: System-dependent requirements

for antennas

ETSI EN 302

217-4-2 V1.2.1


point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN covering

essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for antennas

ETSI EN 301

126-1 V1.1.2

Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1: Point-to-Point

equipment - Definitions, general requirements and test procedures

ETSI EN 301

126-3-1 V1.1.2

Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1: Point-to-Point

antennas; Definitions, general requirements and test procedures

ETSI EN 301 390

V1.2.1

Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems; Spurious

emissions and receiver immunity limits at equipment/antenna port of

Digital Fixed Radio Systems





339




iec 60153-2-1974 Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for ordinary

rectangular waveguides

iec 60154-2-1980 Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides





340



A Glossary

Terms and ab breviations are listed in an alphabetical order.

A.1 Numerics

A.2 A

A.3 B

A.4 C

A.5 D

A.6 E

A.7 F

A.8 G

A.9 H

A.10 I

A.11 J

A.12 L

A.13 M

A.14 N

A.15 OA.16 P

A.17 Q

A.18 R

A.19 S

A.20 T

A.21 U

A.22 V

A.23 W


Product Description A Glossary



341







342



A.1 Numerics

1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protectionSNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is

permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the

normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the

permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic

signal to be provided.

100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.

100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network

over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair

(STP) wire.

10BASE-T Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with the

maximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment.

1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails and

one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.

1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is

because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not

provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the

reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used

on other interfaces for high precision timing.

3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.

A.2 A

ABR Available Bit Rate

AC Alternating Current

ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal

polarizations between two adjacent communication channels.

Active/Standby

switching of cross-

connect board

If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up

relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect

boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active

board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the activecross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply

fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can

automatically take the place of the active one.

add/drop multiplexer A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the

STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

ADM See optical add/drop multiplexing





343



Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer

and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order

VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to

the multiplex section frame start.

Administrative UnitGroup

One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payloadare termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous

assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4.

Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore

product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

aging time N/A

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

Alarm A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists.

Alarm automatic

report

When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,

an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.

alarm filtering The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and save

the alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are not

displayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored.

alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current

status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.

When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the

orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow

indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on

the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro)

Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure

has been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

Alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be

used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.

The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not

inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm

inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode

of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever

the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to

automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the

alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port willautomatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already

been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid

generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the

alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion

status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.

Alarm Masking Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm information

is displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms masked

are not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS.

Alarm Severity Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-T

recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor,

Warning.





344



Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms are

suppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported.

ALS See Automatic laser shutdown

APS See Automatic Protection Switchingasynchronous Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.

Asynchronous

Transfer Mode

A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel

demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network

resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte

header.

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATPC See Automatic Transmit Power Control

attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.

AU See Administrative UnitAUG See Administrative Unit Group

auto-negotiation A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half-

duplex) of an Ethernet Link.

Automatic laser

shutdown

A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board does

not carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function

shortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. In

addition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam.

Automatic Protection

Switching

Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to

detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the

traffic.

Automatic Transmit

Power Control

A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the

transmit signal detected at the receiver.

A.3 B

backplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which

additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in a

computer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard.

backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of

database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data

synchronization between active and standby boards.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a

network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the

transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

BDI Backward Defect Indicator

BER See Bit Error Rate

Binding strap A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables.

binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent

polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).





345



BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code

is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such

a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit

sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over

the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity isgenerated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored

partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit

position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered

portion includes the BIP-X.

bit error An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged,

and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information

Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used

to measure the communications quality of a network.

BITS See Building Integrated Timing Supply

bound path Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughputcapacity.

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges

operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges

store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals.

Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP

addresses.

broadcast The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of

the nodes in the network can receive packets.

Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.

BSC Base Station Controller

BSS Base Station Subsystem

Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the

OSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.

Building Integrated

Timing Supply

A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering

an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.

BWS Backbone WDM System

A.4 C

cabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or

twisted together.

cabling aperture A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.

Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.

cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.





346



captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but

are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the

firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.

CAR See committed access rate

CAS Channel Associated Signaling

CBR See Constant Bit Rate

CBS Committed Burst Size

CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CCM Continuity Check Message

CDR Clock and Data Recovery

CDVT See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance

Cell Delay Variation

Tolerance

This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive

sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does notapply to end-systems.

Centralized alarm

system

The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.

CFM Connectivity Fault Management

Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two

or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio

(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmitted

per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per

second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),

and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

CIR Committed Information Rate

Circuit The circuit of the service port on the access device.

CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree

class of service Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into different

categories according to the service quality.

Class of Service Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets

according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities

for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their priorities.

client A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.

Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal

frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.

Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a

network.

CLP Cell Loss Priority

CM See Configuration Management





347



committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.

CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified

into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate

can be defined.

Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. With

the file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data

is the key factor for the normal running of the entire network.

Configuration

Management

In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes in

a LAN.

Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service

efficiency.

Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound

to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the

input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is

characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point

is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.

Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers

cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend

on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

convergence It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific

routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.

Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or

several channels of required signals.

Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for

the specific requirements of the convergence service user.

Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms

parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a

probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.

corrugated tube N/A

CoS See class of service

CoS See Class of Service

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check

current alarm An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledged

state, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken on

these alarms.

Current Performance

Data

Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers for

each performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15-

minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance data

within the current monitoring period.





348



Cyclic Redundancy

Check

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses

a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending

device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it

sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after

transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission

includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communications

protocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking.

A.5 D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCD Data Carrier Detect

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCN Data Communication Network

DDF See Digital Distribution Frame

DDN Digital Data Network

Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.

demultiplexing To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at many

levels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrier

frequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable.

Device set It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authoritymanagement on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operation

authorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation

authorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thus

eliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It is

suggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, network

level, device type, etc.

differentiated services

code point

Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance class

of service (CoS) distinctions in routers.

Differentiated Services

Code Point

Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits

0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service

streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHBaccording to the DSCP value.

DiffServ Differentiated Services

Digital Distribution

Frame

Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.





349



digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states—for

example, high and low voltages—rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream,

as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz

sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal

is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structuresand broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by

external interference.

Distributed Link

Aggregation Group

The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection

technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.

In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services

can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the

inter-board ports.

DLAG See Distributed Link Aggregation Group

DNI See Dual Node Interconnection

domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.

DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus

DSCP See differentiated services code point

DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point

DSL Digital Subscriber Line

DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DSR Data Set Ready

DTE Data Terminal Equipments

DTR Data Terminal Ready

Dual Node

Interconnection

DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case

of an interconnection failure scenario.

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface

DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

A.6 E

E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation

E-LAN Ethernet LAN

E-LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over

the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2

switch.

E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet

in different domains.

Ear bracket A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet.

ECC See Embedded Control Channel





350



EFM Ethernet in the First Mile

ElectroStatic Discharge A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator.

Embedded Control

Channel

An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data

communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.EMS Element Management System

encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tail

information to the protocol data unit.

Enterprise System

Connection

A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.

It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individually

considered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or

subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet service

processing board is an OAM entity.

EoD Ethernet over Dual Domains

EPL See Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN Service

ESCON See Enterprise System Connection

ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or

cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision

Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/

s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the

configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.

Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between

different customers.

Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.

Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.

ethernet virtual private

line service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared

bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server

layer networks.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service

Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The

protection switching is not really performed.

Exerciser - Ring This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without

completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are

checked, but no working traffic is affected.

Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network

segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.





351



extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for

the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.

A.7 FFailure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function

to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been

detected.

Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the source

node are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain

bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness.

fairness algorithm An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case

of congestion or overloading.

fault An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its requiredfunction.

FC Fiber Channel

FD See frequency diversity

FDDI See fiber distributed data interface

FDI Forward Defect Indicator

FE Fast Ethernet

feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digit

codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).

FEC See forwarding equivalence class

FEC See Forward Error Correction

fiber A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for

connections between subracks or inside a subrack.

Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units.

It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and

provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.

Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple

the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A

connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source

(or a detector).

fiber distributed data

interface

A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-

speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for

transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on

the token ring network.





352



fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical

entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user

information and network management information) and perform transmission function

in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable

transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs

represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical

fiber type.

FICON See Fiber Connect

FIFO First In First Out

Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE

software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that

have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:

port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is

based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.

Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection

channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless

of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards

are satisfying a higher priority bridge request.

Forward Error

Correction

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at

the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during

transmission are corrected at the receive end.

forwarding equivalence

class

A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets with

similar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, they

may be bound to the same MPLS label.

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length

is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.

A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,

a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-

specified by the sending and receiving parties.

Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by

the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this

mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external

reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously

connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflectsthe influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates

when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain

frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then

performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP File Transfer Protocol

Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On

the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.





353



A.8 G

Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the opticalamplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,

which expressed in dB.

Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used

to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the

gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot

identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP

networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the

network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.

Gateway Network

Element

Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serial

port line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC and

communicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communicationroute that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. The

communication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: The

current communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds,

and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: The

destination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or not

within the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gateway

is disabled manually.

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.

GNE See Gateway Network Element

GPS Global Positioning System

GSM Global System for Mobile Communications

GTS Generic Traffic Shaping

GUI Graphic User Interface

A.9 Hhalf-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or

receive data at a time.

handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out of

slots.

Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface

to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

HDLC High level Data Link Control

HEC Header Error Control

History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.





354



History Performance

Data

The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported and

stored in the NMS.

HP Higher Order Path

HPT Higher Order Path Termination

A.10 I

IC Integrated Circuit

IDU Indoor Unit

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

IF Intermediate Frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP Snooping IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up the

multicast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group members

and forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets up

the multicast routes.

IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame

defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links

in an IMA group.

Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when

modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored

seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30

second measurement intervals.

Intelligent power

adjusting

The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors may

result in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting

(IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut down

automatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for

the exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs.

Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.

Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and

optical interfaces within the cabinet.

Internet Group

Management Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among

the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish

and maintain multicast group memberships.

IP Internet Protocol

IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of the

communication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An

IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for

example,192.168.7.27.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote

NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead

DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.





355



IPA See Intelligent power adjusting

IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

ISO International Standard Organization

ISP Internet Service Provider

IST Internal Spanning Tree

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization

A.11 J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system

instability.

jitter tolerance Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on

the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical

equipment.

A.12 L

label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

Label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquely

identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topology

information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topologyinformation.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN Local Area Network

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser

light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor

laser as the light source.

Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchicallyas successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer

of its characteristic information.

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits

and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the

second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

LB See Loopback

LBM Loopback Message

LBR Loopback Reply

LC Lucent Connector





356



LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCT See Local craft terminal

License A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, anddurability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license

consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of

license.

Link In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between

two topological nodes.

Link Aggregation

Control Protocol

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)

that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP

allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

Link Capacity

Adjustment Scheme

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic

provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.

LLC Logical Link Control

Local craft terminal A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission network

consisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management of

the multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over network

cables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE.

Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE.

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been

switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to

the working channel.

LOF Loss of frame

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the

signal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOS Loss Of Signal

Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-

crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.

LP Lower Order Path

LPT Link State Pass Through

LSP Label Switched Path

LSR Label Switching Router

LT Link Trace





357



A.13 M

MA See Maintenance AssociationMAC Medium Access Control

Maintenance

Association

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the

connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance

Entities.

Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed,

belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is defined

by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance.

MAN See Metropolitan Area Network

Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a

higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.

Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of

an SDH network.

Marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation

holes for the cabinet.

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MCF Message Communication Function

MCR Minimum Cell Rate

MD See Maintenance Domain

Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the

transmitter.

MEP Maintenance End Point

Metropolitan Area

Network

A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer

resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local

area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).

The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger

network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is

also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them

with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.

MIB Management Information Base

MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator

MP Maintenance Point

MPID Maintenance Point Identification

MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch

MS Multiplex Section

MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation





358



MSOH See Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP See multiplex section protection

MST Multiplex Section Termination

MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance

MSTP See Multi-service transmission platform

MSTP See Multiple spanning tree protocol

MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

Multi-Protocol Label

Switch

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link

layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of

IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of

networks, and is beneficial to routing.

Multi-servicetransmission platform

It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDMservices, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of

these services.

Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The

destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address

ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast

group rather than a host.

Multiple spanning tree

protocol

The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks

redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,

the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The

protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This

solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/

RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

Multiplex Section

Overhead

The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH

definition.

multiplex section

protection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and

including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a

"protection" channel.

Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher

order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex

section.

A.14 N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection

channel.

NE See network element

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX

equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE,

boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.





359



network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One

NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the

entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.

network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.

network segment Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network.

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS Network Management System

NNI See network node interface

NPC Network Parameter Control

nrt-VBR Non Real-Time Variable Bit Rate

NRZ Non Return to Zero code

NSAP Network Service Access Point

NTP Network Time Protocol

A.15 O

OA See Optical Amplifier

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance

OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet

in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutualEFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM

protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two

ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports

regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.

OCP See Optical Channel Protection

ODF See Optical Distribution Frame

ODU Outdoor Unit

OFS Out-of-frame Second

OHA Overhead Access Function

OLT Optical Line Terminal

Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions

for using their features when so requested by the user.

ONU Optical Network Unit

OOF Out of Frame

optical add/drop

multiplexing

A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop

the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.

Optical Amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the

stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.





360



Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the

optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is

available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

Optical Channel

Protection

In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain

wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the opticalchannel protection is configured.

Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose

of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.

Optical Distribution

Frame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.

Optical Time Domain

Reflectometer

A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system

and measures the time history of the pulse reflection.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OTDR See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals

into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire,

for example, would be considered overhead information.

A.16 P

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the

backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through

between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH

boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K

bytes can be passed through.

pass through When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does not

process the service received and only detects the signal quality.

Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end

of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is

a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the

network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between

a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet

loss ratio or other aspects.

path protection Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique where

every primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of the

network).





361



PBS Peak Burst Size

PC Personal Computer

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PCR Peak Cell Rate

PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider

network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.

Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-

min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history

performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES

register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so

every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is

used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so

as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.performance threshold The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When

the measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads,

the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm.

Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance

event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event

is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for

a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way,

performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performance

events only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lower

threshold are equal.

Permanent Virtual

Connection

Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a

request initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the

connections need to be instructed by the network management).

PGND Protection Ground

PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PIR Peak Information Rate

plesiochronous Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding

significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within

specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals

having durations which may vary without limit.

Plesiochronous Digital

Hierarchy

The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used in

telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport

equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems.

PLL Phase-Locked Loop

Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to

the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

POS Packet Over SDH

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies

power for the subracks in the cabinet.





362



PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

PRBS See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services fromthe lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is

exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmitted

between adjacent layers is called primitive.

Private Line The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by the

telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. The

line is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained.

protection grounding A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, the

cable is yellow and green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection.

Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than

multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves

NEs and fibre cable connections.

Protection View The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage

protection in the network.

PS Packet Switched

PSD Power Spectral Density

Pseudo-Random

Binary Sequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the

values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

PVC See Permanent Virtual Connection

PW Pseudo Wire

PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN

(Packet Switched Network).

A.17 Q

QoS See Quality of Service

Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS

is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,

service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.

A.18 R

Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree

convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with

the STP protocol.

RDI Remote Defect Indication





363



Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received

power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.

Reference clock A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequency

can be compared with other clock as a benchmark.

REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.

Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,

waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.

Regenerator section

overhead

The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.

Remote optical

pumping amplifier

(ROPA)

An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supply

and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation

solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.

Resilient Packet Ring A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.

RF Radio Frequency

RFA Request For Announcement

RFI Request for Information

ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other

nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.

RNC Radio Network Controller

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/

IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

router Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's network

probably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to a

LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.

RP Rendezvous Point

RPR See Resilient Packet Ring

RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can

communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the

transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.

RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital

interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others

are the same as RS232.

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

RX Receiver





364



A.19 S

S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock referencesource through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization

of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock of

this NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protection

switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality

information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to

transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of

the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality

grades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protection

switching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byte

and following the certain switching protocol.

SAN Storage Area Network

SC Square Connector

SCR Sustainable Cell Rate

SD See space diversity

SD See Signal Degrade

SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDP Serious Disturbance Period

SEC SDH Equipment Clock

Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i)

a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating

point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may

be) done.

Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the

NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found

by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that

time.

Serial port extended

ECC

The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.

server A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources,

often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.

Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

SES Severely Errored Second

SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.

SF See Signal Fail

SF See SF

SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-

end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.





365



SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SHDSL Single-line High speed Digital Subscriber Line

Side Mode Suppression

Ratio

The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total

source spectrum to the second largest peak.signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal

cable.

Signal Degrade SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded

defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.

Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect

condition (not being the degraded defect) is active.

Simple Network

Management Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify

the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the

transmission of management information between any two points. The polling

mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the

network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control

information about each device is maintained by a management information block.

slide rail Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet or

shelf.

Small Form-Factor

Pluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SMSR See Side Mode Suppression Ratio

SNC SubNetwork Connection

SNCMP See Subnetwork connection multipath protection

SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection

SNCP node Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connection

protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-network

can support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring,

thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally set

on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively

received.

SNCTP See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal Noise Ratio

space diversity A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but

are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, are

receiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin

Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.

STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through

certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SPI Synchronous Physical Interface

SSM See Synchronization Status Message





366



SSU Synchronization Supply Unit

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be

transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to

active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices

to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.

STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

Sub-network number It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference.

Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire

phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number.

subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network

management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are

destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

Subnetwork connection

multipath protection

The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection.

That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.

SubNetwork

Connection Protection

A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if

the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required

level.

Subnetwork

Connection Tunnel

Protection

SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,

the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.

Support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor

Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression

status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not

occur even when the alarm conditions are met.

SVC Switching Virtual Connection

Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary

board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the

same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher

priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

Switching restoration

time

It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the

line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSPsub-network.

Synchronization Status

Message

A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous

timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the

synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform

operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold,

and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.





367



Synchronous Digital

Hierarchy

SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines

the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,

transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-

ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed

counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since

it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include

clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.

A.20 T

T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication

management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and

network level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network levelmanagement functions. See also NM.

T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the optical

transmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission

equipment. See also LCT.

Tandem Connection

Monitor

In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management

layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality

of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).

TCM See Tandem Connection Monitor

TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TDM Time Division Multiplexing

tie wrap N/A

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able

to interconnect.

Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the

synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals

keeps consistent with the UTC time.

TM Terminal Multiplexer

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

ToS See Type of Service

TPS See Tributary Protection Switch

Trail management

function

A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail

management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual

routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail

quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and

performance data by trail, and print a trail report.





368



Transceiver A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in

common, often for portable or mobile use.

Transmission Control

Protocol/Internet

Protocol

Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of

worldwide internetworks.

transparent

transmission

A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but

encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.

Tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.

Tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the

tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normal

status. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: When

arriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal is

directly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returned

along the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE.

Tributary Protection

Switch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to

protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer

and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order

VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to

the higher order VC frame start.

Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-

n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that

mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed

to increase flexibility of the transport network

TTL Time To Live

TU Tributary Unit

TUG See Tributary Unit Group

Type of Service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS

field is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields.

A.21 U

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

UAS Unavailable Second

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI See User Network Interface

Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot

be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is

interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.

Unprotected sub-

network

It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such

configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trail

management.





369



Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the T2000. The

configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the T2000 side.

Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.

UPS Uninterruptible Power SupplyUpward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation

rights of a user in the NMS.

User Network Interface The interface between a network and the user of network services.

UTC Universal Time Coordinated

A.22 V

VB Virtual Bridge

VBR Variable Bit Rate

VC See Virtual concatenation

VCG Virtual Concatenation Group

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

Virtual concatenation N/A

Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections

in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information

fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

Virtual local area

network

A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each

VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).

Virtual Private

Network

The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and

authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide

remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.

VLAN See Virtual local area network

VP Virtual Path

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

VPN See Virtual Private Network

A.23 W

Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can

be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic

signal from



Date post:	07-Aug-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	thien-nguyen-duc
View:	212 times
Download:	0 times

Product Description(V100R010 08)

Documents